Octel XC1000 Service Manual Download Page 152 | Manualshive

Page: 152 / 889

background image

STARTUP AND INITIALIZATION

4-36

Edition One

XC1000 Service

Six submenus are required for the 144 ports available on XC1000. The
first submenu, menu 4.1, is shown in Figure 4-24.

Menu 4 – Port Assignments

Pt

Extension/

Phone No.

I O

T

M

N

P

Ln

Tp

D

Pt

Gp

Pt

Extension/

Phone No.

I O

T

M

N

P

Ln

Tp

D

Pt

Gp

1A

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

35

1

1

1

1

2A

2B

2C

2D

1B

1C

1D

1E

1F

1G

1H

Y

1

1

1

1

Y

1I

1J

1K

1L

2E

2F

2G

2H

2I

2J

2K

2L

030010001

030010002

030010003

030010004

030010005

030010006

030010007

030010008

030010009

030010010

030010011

030010012

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

1

1

1

1

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

Y

Y

030010013

030010014

030010015

030010016

030010017

030010018

030010019

030010020

030010021

030010022

030010023

030010024

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

Y

Y

Y

Y

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

N

35

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

35

Figure 4-24. Example of a Completed Menu 4.1 Screen for

Ports 1A Through 2L.

The other submenus are the same, except that the port numbers differ.
Only the line types and the number of digits in a forwarded call must be
entered in menu 4 at this stage. The remaining data can be entered by
accessing menu 4 again, after completing menus 1, 2, and 3. However,
information for all of the columns in menu 4 is presented here.

4.5.1 Assigning Line Types

The line types allow the XC1000 to set certain internal operating parame-
ters such as signaling protocols and dial-tone frequencies. Perform the
following steps to establish the line types:

1. From menu 4, enter the submenu that includes the port number

shown in the

Port [number] – Line type is not valid for the type of

PBX System is connected to

prompt.

2. Change the line-type entries in the

Ln Tp

column from the default of

1

to the appropriate line types for the TIC types associated with each

port. Refer to the appropriate configuration note for the installed
switch to determine the line type for specific XC1000 ports.

Press the

Print Send

key to move the cursor directly to the first field in

the

LnTp

column. Enter the number for the correct line type. The line

types supported by XC1000 are as follows:

3. In-Band ATIC, loop start, dial tone disconnect

6. Generic ATIC, loop start, dial tone disconnect

9. DID, rotary, immediate start

10. DID, rotary, wink start

SECTION 4.5

«
...
150
151
152
153
154
...
»

Summary of Contents for XC1000

Page 1: ...EDITION ONE XC1000 P N 101 1345 000 SERVICE MANUAL ...

Page 2: ...4 0 Copyright Information Copyright 1994 by Octel Communications Corporation 1001 Murphy Ranch Road Milpitas California 95035 7912 All rights reserved No part of this book may be reproduced in any form without written permission from Octel Communications Corporation Printed in the United States of America TEXT PRINTED ON RECYCLED PAPER ...

Page 3: ... Index The first four parts comprise chapters that detail procedures for specific functions The last four parts include supplementary informa tion As needed each part or chapter can be removed and used separately by the installer and service personnel Chapters are numbered sequentially throughout the manual Each chapter includes a detailed table of contents A general table of contents is included ...

Page 4: ...résent appareil numérique n émet pas de bruite radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la class A prescrites dans le Règlement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le ministère des Communications du Canada FCC PART 68 STATEMENT This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains the FCC registra...

Page 5: ...rrect the problem and informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC In the event that repairs are needed on your XC1000 they should be per formed by Octel Communications Corporation or an authorized representative of Octel Communications Corporation or the warranty or service agreement could be void Call your local Octel representative Octel personnel are available at response centers in...

Page 6: ... 2 Wire E M Type II Side B 4 Wire E M Type I Side B 4 Wire E M Type II Side B 2 Wire E M Type I Side A 2 Wire E M Type II Side A 4 Wire E M Type I Side A 4 Wire E M Type II Side A RJ21X RJ21X RJ21X RJ2EX RJ2FX RJ2GX RJ2HX RJ2EX RJ2FX RJ2GX RJ2HX 0 7B 0 7B 0 0B 9 0F 9 0F 9 0F 9 0F 9 0F 9 0F 9 0F 9 0F 02LS2 02GS2 02RV2 T TL11E TL12E TL31E TL32E TL11M TL12M TL31M TL32M FCC Requirements for Direct Inw...

Page 7: ...MENTS XC1000 SERVICE viii Edition One XC1000 Service This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded to the PSTN except when A call is unanswered A busy tone is received A reorder tone is received ...

Page 8: ...CONTENTS ...

Page 9: ...EQUIREMENTS 2 5 2 6 CABLING REQUIREMENTS 2 6 2 7 FLOOR MOUNT INSTALLATION 2 26 2 8 HIGHLIGHTS 2 26 THREE PLATFORM INSTALLATION 3 1 OVERVIEW 3 1 3 2 ENSURING EQUIPMENT AND PERSONNEL SAFETY 3 1 3 3 OBTAINING REQUIRED TOOLS 3 4 3 4 INSPECTING AND UNPACKING THE XC1000 3 5 3 5 INSTALLING THE XC1000 3 7 3 6 CONNECTING 48 VDC PRIMARY POWER AND GROUNDS 3 16 3 7 CONNECTING TELEPHONE CABLES 3 18 3 8 CONNECT...

Page 10: ...STICS 4 18 4 4 COMPLETING THE FIRST TIME SETUP IN MENU 0 4 28 4 5 ESTABLISHING LINE TYPES AND PORT ASSIGNMENTS 4 35 4 6 USING THE MAIN MENU 4 40 4 7 CHANGING INSTALLATION INFORMATION 4 41 4 8 ESTABLISHING DIALING AND SERIAL CHANNEL PARAMETERS 4 43 4 9 VERIFYING XC1000 OPERATION 4 57 4 10 HIGHLIGHTS 4 59 SECTION II MAINTENANCE FIVE ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 5 1 OVERVIEW 5 1 5 2 REVIEWING THE CURRENT ALAR...

Page 11: ...TATUS LOG 7 1 OVERVIEW 7 1 7 2 UNDERSTANDING STATUS LOG TERMS AND PARTS 7 2 7 3 READING COMMON STATUS LOG ENTRIES 7 9 7 4 HIGHLIGHTS 7 52 EIGHT REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT 8 1 OVERVIEW 8 1 8 2 XC1000 SHUTDOWN 8 1 8 3 LOGIC CARD REPLACEMENTS 8 2 8 4 DRIVE REPAIRS AND REPLACEMENTS 8 11 8 5 POWER SUPPLY AND POWER DISTRIBUTION REPLACEMENTS 8 40 8 6 FAN REPLACEMENT 8 51 8 7 BACKPLANE REPLACEMENT 8 55 8 8 SI...

Page 12: ... 9 38 SECTION III AUXILIARY INFORMATION TEN COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS 10 1 OVERVIEW 10 1 10 2 COMMON CONTROL CARDS 10 4 10 3 LINE CARD GROUPS 10 14 10 4 POWER SUPPLIES 10 24 10 5 MAIN BACKPLANE 10 26 10 6 MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD 10 28 10 7 DRIVES AND DRIVE BACKPLANES 10 30 10 8 SYSTEM MANAGER TERMINAL SMT 10 32 10 9 CALL FLOW 10 33 10 10 HIGHLIGHTS 10 35 ELEVEN OPTIONAL FEATURES 11 1 OVERVIEW 11 1 11...

Page 13: ...5 RUN GARBAGE COLLECT 12 5 12 6 BACK UP SYSTEM DRIVE 0 12 7 12 7 UPGRADE THE HARDWARE 12 8 12 8 UPGRADE NEW SOFTWARE AND PHRASES TO SYSTEM DRIVES 12 13 12 9 CONVERT SYSTEM DISTRIBUTION LISTS TO MAILBOXES 12 16 12 10 CONFIGURE THE SERIAL CHANNEL PARAMETERS 12 17 12 11 ENABLE THE SPECIAL MESSAGE WAITING FEATURE FOR SMDI INTEGRATIONS 12 27 12 12 RETURN THE XC1000 TO SERVICE 12 27 12 13 HIGHLIGHTS 12 ...

Page 14: ...RAMETERS 13 18 13 15 ENABLE THE SPECIAL MESSAGE WAITING FEATURE FOR SMDI INTEGRATIONS 13 27 13 16 RETURN THE XC1000 TO SERVICE 13 28 13 17 UPDATE INSTRUCTIONS 13 28 13 18 HIGHLIGHTS 13 38 FOURTEEN RELEASE 3 02 FCP CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS 14 1 OVERVIEW 14 1 14 2 CHECKING THE MAJOR STEPS 14 2 14 3 ENSURE THAT THE CORRECT EQUIPMENT IS AVAILABLE 14 3 14 4 ENABLE THE ENGINEERING BIT AND DISABLE ALL POR...

Page 15: ...R TERMINAL SMT 15 4 15 6 VERIFY THE SYSTEM BOOT AREA 15 5 15 7 CONNECT THE PC AND THE XC1000 15 5 15 8 INSTALL ONLINE UPGRADE TOOL 1 00 ON THE PC HARD DRIVE 15 6 15 9 VERIFY THE SETUP IN THE SETUP MENU 15 8 15 10 LOAD SOFTWARE AND PHRASE DISKETTES ON THE PC HARD DRIVE 15 9 15 11 BEGIN THE AUTOMATIC UPGRADE 15 13 15 12 RECONNECT THE SMT AND VERIFY THE UPGRADE 15 17 15 13 RESET THE BOOT AREA 15 17 1...

Page 16: ... 1 OVERVIEW 17 1 17 2 CHECK THE MAJOR STEPS 17 2 17 3 MAKE SURE THAT THE CORRECT EQUIPMENT IS AVAILABLE 17 3 17 4 ENABLE THE ENGINEERING BIT AND DISABLE ALL PORTS 17 7 17 5 CALCULATE USER RECORD AVAILABILITY 17 7 17 6 PRINT RELEVANT MENUS AND RUN VALIDITY CHECKS AND GARBAGE COLLECT 17 9 17 7 LOAD MIRROR SOFTWARE FCP CONVERSION TOOL AND SOFTWARE AND PHRASE DISKETTES 17 12 17 8 CONNECT THE PC AND TH...

Page 17: ...NE UPGRADE TOOL 1 10C ON THE PC HARD DRIVE 18 8 18 9 VERIFY THE SETUP IN THE SETUP MENU 18 10 18 10 LOAD SOFTWARE AND PHRASE DISKETTES ON THE PC HARD DRIVE 18 11 18 11 BEGIN THE AUTOMATIC UPGRADE 18 15 18 12 RECONNECT THE SMT AND VERIFY THE UPGRADE 18 19 18 13 VERIFY DRIVE INTEGRITY 18 20 18 14 RESET THE BOOT AREA 18 20 18 15 DISABLE THE ENGINEERING BIT 18 21 18 16 MAKE SOFTWARE AND PHRASE AREAS R...

Page 18: ...xviii Edition One XC1000 Service TWENTY RELEASE 4 1 SYSTEM UTILITIES 20 1 OVERVIEW 20 1 20 2 ONLINE CDR UTILITY 20 1 APPENDIXES A 1 GLOSSARY Gloss 1 INDEX Index 1 Chapter Page ...

Page 19: ...1 INTRODUCTION ...

Page 20: ... Integrations 1 5 1 2 3 2 In Band Integrations 1 5 1 2 3 3 R2 Integrations 1 6 1 2 3 4 Common Channel Signaling Signaling System 7 CCS SS7 Integrations 1 6 1 2 4 ACP Multiple Terminal Access 1 6 1 3 PLATFORM REQUIREMENTS 1 6 1 4 HIGHLIGHTS 1 8 TABLE Table 1 1 Platform Requirements 1 6 FIGURES Figure 1 1 Dual Cabinet Nonredundant 1 3 Figure 1 2 Call Flow 1 4 Section Page ...

Page 21: ...ovides three basic functions Telephone answering If a mailbox subscriber is not available to answer a telephone call the switch can forward the call to the subscriber s mailbox on XC1000 The caller can then leave a voice message for the subscriber Voice messaging XC1000 subscribers can send messages to other XC1000 subscribers without being in direct contact with them In a single session in their ...

Page 22: ...an provide the full load The Dual Cabinet Nonredundant configuration includes one CPU one system file card one message file card and one optional ACP card Figure 1 1 cabinets 1 and 2 The two cabinets together have 12 TIC slots and 12 DLC slots allowing up to six line card groups composed of TICs and DLCs for a total of 144 ports and two redundant 5 Vdc and two redundant 12 Vdc power supply pairs I...

Page 23: ... Figure 1 1 Dual Cabinet Nonredundant The main backplane connects logic cards to the system data and control buses distributes power to all cards and provides the interface between trunks and TICs The main backplane also provides the pulse code modulation PCM bus that allows communications between TICs and DLCs The disk backplanes in cabinet 1 allow the file cards to communicate with the system an...

Page 24: ...m disk drive utilities for maintenance tasks The primary SMT is normally located close to the XC1000 cabinet and connected to this port An optional printer can be attached to the SMT 1 2 2 Software The operating software is permanently stored on system drives 0 and 1 S0 and S1 and uploaded to the CPU random access memory RAM during the boot process The hard disk based software includes the followi...

Page 25: ...e separate SMDI data links in a standard configuration or up to 16 data links with the optional ACP The switch transmits the subscriber s telephone number to XC1000 through a data link when the switch forwards a call to XC1000 XC1000 matches the call at the port with the called subscriber s number prompts the caller to leave a message and stores the caller s message in the subscriber s mailbox XC1...

Page 26: ...installed either at local or remote locations Up to seven administrators can access the XC1000 database from these separate terminals to make configuration changes review the status logs and perform other control functions These seven terminals can access different areas of the XC1000 database simultaneously Without the ACP MTA option up to three SMTs can be accessed but the number of RS 232 integ...

Page 27: ...ectrical Characteristics Input voltages 48 Vdc 56 Vdc to 42 Vdc System current Single cabinet 30 amperes maximum Dual cabinet 45 amperes maximum Power Single cabinet 1500 watts maximum Dual cabinet 2 250 watts maximum Environmental Characteristics Ambient temperature normal operation 2 35 C 35 95 F Ambient relative humidity normal operation 20 80 noncondensing Heat dissipation Single cabinet 5 125...

Page 28: ...ice messaging and call processing XC1000 is available in three configurations single cabinet nonredun dant dual cabinet nonredundant and dual cabinet redundant TICs DLCs and power supplies are hot pluggable XC1000 supports RS 232 in band R2 and CCS SS7 integrations The MTA feature allows up to seven SMTs at either local or remote locations SECTION 1 4 ...

Page 29: ...n Chapter Three includes information required to install the XC1000 from the time that it arrives on the shipping dock is transported to its final location and is installed on the floor mounts During installation the cables prepared during the site preparation are connected the primary SMT and printer are installed the logic cards are configured the switches are set on the main distribution board ...

Page 30: ...2 SITE PREPARATION ...

Page 31: ...ions 2 9 2 6 2 2 E M TIC Cable Connections 2 12 2 6 2 3 T1 TIC Cable Connections 2 14 2 6 2 4 E1 TIC Cable Connections 2 15 2 6 2 5 PTIC Cable Connections 2 16 2 6 3 Main Distribution Board 2 18 2 6 3 1 SMT Connections 2 19 2 6 3 2 Data Link Connections 2 19 2 6 3 3 External Alarm Connections 2 19 2 6 3 4 SCCS Interface Connection 2 20 2 6 3 5 Data Module X 25 Connection to XC1000 2 22 2 6 4 ACP I...

Page 32: ...n Backplane Connectors for E M TICs 2 14 Table 2 7 Backplane T1 Connector Pin Assignments 2 14 Table 2 8 T1 TIC Channels for Each Cable to XC1000 Ports 2 15 Table 2 9 RS 232 C Pins for the SMT 2 19 Table 2 10 Connector Pin Assignments for RS 232 Data Link Connections J44 J43 and J46 2 19 Table 2 11 J25 Pin Assignments for the Amphenol Plug for Remote Alarms 2 21 Table 2 12 Data Link Connector Assi...

Page 33: ...ckplane 2 10 Figure 2 7 Dimensions to E M TIC Connectors on the Main Backplane 2 12 Figure 2 8 Dimensions to E1 TIC or PTIC Connectors on the Main Backplane 2 17 Figure 2 9 Adapter Board Connections for the E1 TIC or PTIC 2 18 Figure 2 10 Dimensions to the Distribution Board for Data Link Ports and External Alarms 2 20 Figure 2 11 Dimensions to the Distribution Board for SCCS and X 25 Interface Ca...

Page 34: ...rve all distance and length limitations specified in this chapter Use shielded cable for all telephone wiring and data connections to external hardware The customer is responsible for all equip ment not supplied by Octel and for meeting XC1000 site requirements Figure 2 1 shows the flow of the relevant site preparation tasks discussed this chapter Appendix A provides a site preparation checklist D...

Page 35: ...rom the shipping dock Figure 2 2 shows XC1000 dimensions and crate dimensions 26 IN WIDE 66 CM 64 IN HIGH 84 IN CRATE HEIGHT 208 CM 18 IN DEEP 41 IN CRATE DEPTH 42 IN CRATE WIDTH 46 CM 104 CM 163 CM 107 CM Figure 2 2 XC1000 Dimensions Crated and Uncrated 2 3 SPACE REQUIREMENTS Plan a location for the XC1000 that is close enough to the switch equipment for optimum performance For example at sites u...

Page 36: ...ANCE 36 IN 91 CM 46 CM 91 CM PRIMARY SYSTEM MANAGER TERMINAL 52 IN 133 CM Figure 2 3 XC1000 Cabinet Required Clearances Two Cabinets Top View Plan a location for the primary system manager terminal SMT and optional printer If the SMT is to be located more than 50 feet from the XC1000 a customer supplied data set is required rather than a direct cable 2 4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Communications s...

Page 37: ...1 300 Kg cal hr Dual cabinet 7 685 Btu hr 1 945 Kg cal hr Vent openings At cabinet front Intake At cabinet back Exhaust outlet Each XC1000 cabinet dissipates a maximum of 1500 W during normal operation An air conditioning system must be operating before XC1000 is installed Consider the following alternatives If the system in place at the switch location is not adequate for the needs of the XC1000 ...

Page 38: ... lug supplied with the primary cabinet to connect the ground wire to the frame The XC1000 was designed to be installed as an isolated ground load using a single point grounding system Connect each XC1000 frame single or dual cabinet separately to the nearest safety ground bus in the building without bridging or chaining to adjacent equipment In a dual cabinet system connect and ground the expansio...

Page 39: ...cabinet 30 A 45 A Bring the power connections the 48 Vdc return and ground to the location of the power distribution shelf of cabinet 1 Leave the circuit inactive until the power cables are connected to the XC1000 Refer to section 2 6 for wire termination locations 2 6 CABLING REQUIREMENTS A number of external cables are required for the XC1000 All RS 232 data links for integration remote terminal...

Page 40: ...loor as a reference for the connector location to which the cable is to be attached When a XC1000 is installed dress the cables down or up the side of the cabinet to a point about 60 inches 152 centimeters above the floor run the cables laterally across the top of the cabinet and drop them to the appropriate connector Mark each cable end for its termination for easy identification during installat...

Page 41: ...ite for peripheral devices and test equipment 2 Make sure to provide 45 ampere 48 Vdc power if you plan to expand to a dual cabinet in the future This planning will eliminate having to expand the current capacity later 3 Install the power cables using one of the following methods Drop an insulated power cable for power return and ground with strain relief to reach the power distribution shelf show...

Page 42: ...rovides 12 voice ports Because DLCs support 12 voice lines a DLC is required for every ATIC or DID TIC Analog and DID TICs are installed in odd numbered slots beginning with slot 7 in cabinet 1 and slot 25 in cabinet 2 The DLC associated with a TIC is installed in the even numbered slot immediately following the TIC slot Determine the cable length as follows 1 For standard loop or ground start lin...

Page 43: ...IC DID TIC CONNECTORS OR T1 TIC FEMALE Figure 2 6 Dimensions to ATIC DID TIC or T1 TIC Connectors on the Main Backplane 2 Allow sufficient length for the cable to reach and cross the top of the main backplane and drop vertically to the backplane connector as shown for port 1 3 Add approximately 5 inches 152cm to the cable length measured to the point where the cable will be run laterally across th...

Page 44: ...R RD 9 OR VO 22 J Tip RD SL 35 VO GR 48 J Ring SL RD 10 GR VO 23 K Tip BK BL 36 VO BR 49 K Ring BL BK 11 BR VO 24 L Tip BK OR 37 VO SL 50 L Ring OR BK 12 SL VO 25 BK GR 38 GR BK 13 Table 2 4 Wire Color Codes Color Group Color Designator WH white BL blue RD red OR orange BK black GR green YL yellow BR brown VO violet SL slate Each cable carries 12 telephone lines to one TIC connector For example li...

Page 45: ...th for the cable to reach and cross the top of the main backplane and drop vertically to the backplane connector as shown for TIC1 and TIC7 in Figure 2 7 12 11 10 9 8 7 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 IN 30 CM 14 IN 36 CM 26 IN 66 CM 12 IN 30 CM 14 IN 36 CM LEFT FRAME REFERENCE RIGHT FRAME REFERENCE 5 IN 13 CM 60 IN 152 CM FLOOR REFERENCE CABINET 2 CABINET 1 REAR VIEW NOTES MAIN BACKPLAN...

Page 46: ... E T YL GR 42 B R SL WH 5 E R GR YL 17 B T1 RD BL 31 E T1 YL BR 43 B R1 BL RD 6 E R1 BR YL 18 B SGa RD OR 32 E SGa YL SL 44 B E OR RD 7 E E SL YL 19 B SBa RD GR 33 E SBa VO BL 45 B M GR RD 8 E M BL VO 20 C T RD BR 34 F T VO OR 46 C R BR RD 9 F R OR VO 21 C T1 RD SL 35 F T1 VO GR 47 C R1 SL RD 10 F R1 GR VO 22 C SGa BK BL 36 F SGa VO BR 48 C E BL BK 11 F E BR VO 23 C SBa BK OR 37 F SBa VO SL 49 C M...

Page 47: ...RD BR 34 L T VO OR 46 I R BR RD 9 L R OR VO 21 I T1 RD SL 35 L T1 VO GR 47 I R1 SL RD 10 L R1 GR VO 22 I SGa BK BL 36 L SGa VO BR 48 I E BL BK 11 L E BR VO 23 I SBa BK OR 37 L SBa VO SL 49 I M OR BK 12 L M SL VO 24 a Present but used only for type II signaling b Refer to Table 2 4 for definition of wire color codes 2 6 2 3 T1 TIC Cable Connections Use a shielded cable from the T1 span terminating ...

Page 48: ... 3K 11 5K 11 7K 11 9K 11 11K 12 1L 12 3L 12 5L 12 7L 12 9L 12 11L 13 2A 13 4A 13 6A 13 8A 13 10A 13 12A 14 2B 14 4B 14 6B 14 8B 14 10B 14 12B 15 2C 15 4C 15 6C 15 8C 15 10C 15 12C 16 2D 16 4D 16 6D 16 8D 16 10D 16 12D 17 2E 17 4E 17 6E 17 8E 17 10E 17 12E 18 2F 18 4F 18 6F 18 8F 18 10F 18 12F 19 2G 19 4G 19 6G 19 8G 19 10G 19 12G 20 2H 20 4H 20 6H 20 8H 20 10H 20 12H 21 2I 21 4I 21 6I 21 8I 21 10I...

Page 49: ... backplane varies On a single cabinet XC1000 installed with one PTIC the PTIC adapter board must be connected to the TIC1 connector on the main backplane If two PTICs are required the adapter board must be connected to TIC1 and TIC3 connectors on the main backplane If three PTICs are required the adapter board must be connected to TIC1 TIC3 and TIC5 connectors on the main backplane For cabinet 2 s...

Page 50: ...CABLE ATTACHES TO ADAPTERS AT APPROPRIATE LOCATIONS ONE TO THREE CONNNECTIONS CAN BE USED FOR A SINGLE CABINET CONFIGURATION AND FOUR CONNECTIONS MUST BE USED FOR A DUAL CABINET CONFIGURATION MAIN BACKPLANE CONNECTORS ON 2 INCH 5 CM CENTERS DIMENSIONS ARE APPROXIMATE ALLOW SLACK FOR CABLES FRAME REFERENCES FROM THE FRONT E1 TIC OR PTIC 14 IN 36 CM 22 IN 56 CM 18 IN 46 CM 14 IN 36 CM CONNECTORS Fig...

Page 51: ...tion b 120 ohm symmetrical pair connection SCREW 6 32 SCREW 4 40 Figure 2 9 Adapter Board Connections for the E1 TIC or PTIC 2 6 3 Main Distribution Board Cables for the alarm outputs SCCS output X 25 integration links and the primary SMT are connected to the distribution board located at the rear of cabinet 1 These cable connections are discussed in sections 2 6 4 1 through 2 6 3 5 These cables i...

Page 52: ...XC1000 can support only one primary and two secondary SMTs 2 6 3 2 Data Link Connections Three RS 232 connections J44 J43 and J46 are provided on the main distribution board for integration The connections also can be used for secondary SMTs Table 2 10 lists the pin assignments Table 2 10 Connector Pin Assignments for RS 232 Data Link Connections J44 J43 and J46 Pin No Description 1 Ground 2 Trans...

Page 53: ...EFERENCE MALE FEMALE Figure 2 10 Dimensions to the Distribution Board for Data Link Ports and External Alarms Table 2 11 lists the pin assignments for connector J25 Refer to Table 2 4 for wire color code definition 2 6 3 4 SCCS Interface Connection The SCCS interface provides alarm output connections to a remote location Refer to Table 2 10 for pin connections Figure 2 11 shows the cable length di...

Page 54: ...SL SA 22 OR VO 23 GN VO 47 VO OR OOS 24 BR VO 25 SL VO 49 VO BR Internal RDAC 26 WH BL 1 BL WH 26 IN 66 CM 20 IN 51 CM 19 IN 49 CM 18 IN 46 CM LEFT FRAME REFERENCE RIGHT FRAME REFERENCE 37 IN 94 CM CABINET 1 REAR VIEW NOTES DATA LINK PORT CONNECTORS ON 0 875 INCH 2 2 CM CENTERS FRAME REFERENCES FROM THE FRONT CHANNEL 1 X 25 INTERFACE CHANNEL 0 X 25 INTERFACE SCCS INTERFACE FLOOR REFERENCE Figure 2...

Page 55: ...tribution boards are all DB25 male connector types Table 2 12 Data Link Connector Assignments Integration Data Link No ACP I O Distribution Board Connector No 1 1 J103 2 1 J104 3 1 J105 4 1 J106 5 1 J107 6 2 J103 7 2 J104 8 2 J105 9 2 J106 10 2 J107 11 1 J108 12 1 J109 13 1 J110 14 2 J108 15 2 J109 16 2 J110 2 6 4 1 Integration Data Link Connections XC1000 with the ACP option can support integrati...

Page 56: ... Link Connections Up to seven remote MTA data links can be connected to XC1000 at J111 through J117 on ACP I O distribution board 2 Figure 2 12 Each data link requires a shielded cable and a DB25 male connector refer to Table 2 12 for connector pin assignments Table 2 13 relates the link number with the connector number All of these seven MTA links can transmit data TxD and receive data RxD with R...

Page 57: ...ear of the busy out controller As required relay contact 0 can be assigned as an alarm output J2 and J3 connectors form part of the cabinet internal wiring Table 2 14 lists the connector pin assignments and Figure 2 13 shows the dimensions to allow cabling to the busy out controller Table 2 14 Busy Out Controller Connector J1 Pin Assignments J1 Connector Make Busy Wire Pair J1 Connector Channel Wi...

Page 58: ...tact 18 44 YL GR 19 GR YL Relay contact 19 45 YL BR 20 BR YL Relay contact 20 46 YL SL 21 SL YL Relay contact 21 47 VO BL 22 BL VO Relay contact 22 48 VO OR 23 OR VO Relay contact 23 49 VO GR 24 GR VO Relay contact 24 50 BR VO 25 VO BR Refer to Table 2 4 for definition of wire color codes 26 IN 66 CM 4 IN 10 CM LEFT FRAME REFERENCE RIGHT FRAME REFERENCE CABINET 1 REAR VIEW NOTE FRAME REFERENCES AR...

Page 59: ...raised floor must be constructed of fire resistant materials and conform to local building codes Refer to Chapter Three for XC1000 cabinet installation procedures Two floor mounts are required for the cabinets of a dual cabinet system The two cabinets are connected as a single unit then mounted to the floor 2 8 HIGHLIGHTS The procedures in this chapter are used to prepare the site so that the XC10...

Page 60: ...3 PLATFORM INSTALLATION ...

Page 61: ...ets 3 9 3 5 1 3 Connecting the Intercabinet Signal Cables 3 12 3 5 1 4 Connecting Intercabinet Power and Ground 3 13 3 5 2 Concrete Floor Installation 3 14 3 5 3 Raised Floor Installation 3 16 3 6 CONNECTING 48 VDC PRIMARY POWER AND GROUNDS 3 16 3 7 CONNECTING TELEPHONE CABLES 3 18 3 7 1 ATIC or a DID TIC Telephone Connections 3 18 3 7 2 E M TIC Telephone Connections 3 19 3 7 3 T1 TIC Telephone Co...

Page 62: ... 3 11 4 E1 TIC Configuration 3 36 3 11 5 PTIC Configuration 3 38 3 11 6 File Card Configuration 3 38 3 11 7 CPU Configuration 3 40 3 11 8 Monitor Card Configuration 3 42 3 12 SETTING DISTRIBUTION BOARD CONFIGURATION SWITCHES 3 42 3 13 CONFIGURING OPTIONAL FEATURES 3 44 3 13 1 ACP Card Configuration 3 44 3 13 2 Busy Out Controller Configuration 3 44 3 14 INSTALLING THE REMOTE DIAGNOSTICS TERMINAL 3...

Page 63: ...ip Switch Settings for PTICs 3 39 Table 3 10 Jumper Settings for PTICs 3 39 Table 3 11 Monitor Card Audible Alarm Configuration Switch Settings 3 43 Table 3 12 S2 Alarm Configuration Switches 3 44 Table 3 13 ACP Card Configuration Switches 3 44 Table 3 14 Busy Out Controller Configuration Switch Settings 3 45 FIGURES Figure 3 1 Installation Procedures 3 1 Figure 3 2 Examples of Shock and Tilt Watc...

Page 64: ...d DLC Logic Bay Slot Locations 3 32 Figure 3 18 E M TIC and DLC Logic Bay Slot Locations 3 33 Figure 3 19 T1 TIC and DLC Logic Bay Slot Locations 3 34 Figure 3 20 T1 TIC Showing Line Configuration Switches 3 35 Figure 3 21 E1 TIC PTIC and DLC Logic Bay Slot Locations 3 36 Figure 3 22 Location of Switches and Jumpers on the E1 TIC 3 37 Figure 3 23 Locations of Switches and Jumpers on the PTIC 3 40 ...

Page 65: ...TA LINKS AND MTA TO ACP I O DISTRIBUTION BOARD CONNECT BUSY OUT CABLE AND POWER INSTALL SMT AND PRINTER VERIFY OR SET CONFIGURATION SWITCHES CHECK SYSTEM WIRING INSTALLATION COMPLETE PROCEED WITH INITIAL STARTUP PROCEDURE ENSURE EQUIPMENT AND PERSONAL SAFETY OBTAIN TOOLS Figure 3 1 Installation Procedures Before installing the XC1000 the site must be prepared as described in Chapter Two Site Prepa...

Page 66: ...cal mishandling Caution Some of the installation tasks require attaching cables to the XC1000 grounding the XC1000 installing modules and setting configuration switches on telephone interface cards TICs When performing any of these tasks follow these precautions Because the XC1000 modules are sensitive to static when working on the XC1000 make sure to wear an antistatic wrist strap that is grounde...

Page 67: ... primary power to the XC1000 the ac power itself can present a signifi cant safety hazard Make sure that any ac power at the site is properly connected to the converter and that the converter is correctly grounded in accordance with National Electrical Code NEC requirements 3 2 2 Equipment Handling Safety The primary XC1000 cabinet cabinet 1 weighs up to 700 pounds 317 5 kg and the expansion cabin...

Page 68: ...s are required to uncrate assemble and install either a single cabinet or a dual cabinet XC1000 Crowbar or claw hammer Screwdrivers Phillips head no 2 flat blade medium Wrenches socket 9 16 inch drive socket 1 2 inch drive open end 9 16 inch 3 8 inch L type Hex key supplied in floor mount kit torque socket 1 2 inch drive recommended Sockets 7 32 inch hex bit 1 2 inch 9 16 inch and 3 4 inch Voltmet...

Page 69: ...e that there is sufficient clearance through hallways and door openings for the equipment to pass Perform the following steps when the XC1000 has been received 1 Make sure that the carrier s agent remains at the site until the un packing and inventory have been completed 2 On the receiving dock inspect the outside of the crate including the shock watch and all other containers Also check the tilt ...

Page 70: ...ure that follows to uncrate the XC1000 FRONT CASTERS PALLET FOAM STEP 5 REMOVE BOLTS THAT HOLD XC1000 TO PALLET STEP 9 TIGHTEN FOUR BOLTS TO LIFT XC1000 STEP 6 REMOVE FOUR LAG BOLTS AND 2x6 BOARD SECURED BY THE BOLTS STEP 7 ALIGN THE TWO HOLES IN THE RAMP WITH THE HOLES IN THE PALLET STEP 8 SLIP TWO LAG BOLTS THROUGH THE RAMP INTO PALLET HOLES Figure 3 3 Removing the XC1000 Cabinet From the Packin...

Page 71: ... the ramp Be careful when rolling the XC1000 down the ramp Serious personal injury could result if the XC1000 is tilted enough to fall on someone or is moved in a manner to pin a person against a hard surface The XC1000 could also be damaged Warning 10 Using caution roll the cabinet down the ramp out of the crate 3 5 INSTALLING THE XC1000 The cabinets in a dual cabinet XC1000 must be bolted togeth...

Page 72: ...Cable assembly P53 expansion cabinet 1 057 1182 000 Cable assembly P51 expansion cabinet 1 057 1268 000 Cable assembly multicabinet ground 1 065 2008 000 Plug frame alignment 4 244 2024 000 Assembly main backplane extension 1 Use the following procedures to bolt cabinet 1 primary cabinet and cabinet 2 expansion cabinet together and to connect the intercabinet wiring If the second cabinet is being ...

Page 73: ...Reinstall the 10 screws and the grounding strap removed in step 6 a 7 Remove and save the 10 screws and grounding straps from the right side of cabinet 2 8 Attach the right side cover and the grounding straps removed in step 6 from cabinet 1 to the right side of cabinet 2 Use the screws saved in step 7 The facing sides of the cabinets do not have covers 3 5 1 2 Connecting the Two Cabinets Figure 3...

Page 74: ...INET 1 POWER TERMINAL BLOCK FOR CABINET 2 MAIN BACKPLANE MAIN BACKPLANE PINS MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD TO CONNECTOR J51 TO CONNECTOR J53 MAIN BACKPLANE EXTENDER MULTICABINET GROUND STRAP P51 SIGNALING CABLE P53 SIGNALING CABLE DISTRIBUTION BOARD SERIAL BUS TERMINATOR EXPANSION CABINET CABINET 2 SECONDARY Figure 3 4 Rear View of Dual Cabinet XC1000 Showing Connection Points SECTION 3 5 ...

Page 75: ... connection flanges press nuts 7 If the optional auxiliary equipment shelves have been installed on top of both cabinets insert four 5 16 18 by 11 8 inch hex head bolts four 5 16 inch split washers and four flat washers through the cabinet 1 auxiliary equipment shelf connection flanges press nuts into the threaded connection flanges press nuts on the auxiliary equipment shelf of cabinet 2 8 Make s...

Page 76: ...pansion cabinet will not function The large PCB on the PCB cable assembly connects to cabinet 1 The smaller board connects to cabinet 2 Caution 6 Connect the PCB cable assembly to the main backplane pins so that the extender is attached to the main backplane terminator connector pins on both cabinets Connect the large PCB on the PCB cable assembly to cabinet 1 connect the small PCB to cabinet 2 7 ...

Page 77: ...nd fitting and nut attached to the side wall of the power distribution shelf Remove and discard the nut to allow the conduit to slide freely Do not remove the conduit end fitting 4 Push the conduit into cabinet 1 guiding it into the conduit fitting already installed in the side wall of the cabinet 1 power distribution shelf Tighten the set screw on the fitting to secure the conduit 5 Locate the tw...

Page 78: ...inch open end wrench 4 Attach floor mounting angle brackets P N 061 2188 000 to the cabinet with the bolts removed in step 3 Do not tighten these bolts completely leave them just short of binding The floor mounting angle brackets must be able to move when leveling the cabinet 5 Use the leveling feet to lower the cabinet until the floor mounting angle brackets contact the floor Continue turning the...

Page 79: ...MOUNT ANGLE FLOOR MOUNT INSULATOR 000093 Figure 3 6 Octel XC1000 Platform Showing the Location of Angle Brackets 9 Place a drop in anchor P N 048 1177 000 into each hole To lock the anchor in each hole insert the small end of the setting tool P N 169 1026 000 into the drop in anchor Use a hammer to drive the setting tool into the anchor until the shoulder of the tool bottoms on the top of the anch...

Page 80: ...ons 2 Drill holes through the floor supporting structure in the locations marked using a 1 2 inch drill bit 3 Clear away any metal shavings and make sure there are no metal burrs in any of the holes 4 Place the floor insulators P N 050 2011 000 on the floor at the front and rear of the cabinet aligning the holes in the floor insulators with the holes in the floor 5 Reattach the floor mount angle b...

Page 81: ...double stud ground located above the cabinet 1 terminal block inside the power distribution shelf as shown in Figure 3 7 The double stud ground is part of the cabinet frame structure Secure the chassis ground wire with 1 4 20 nuts and lock washers A compression clamp grounding lug is supplied a swaged lug is available as an option CABINET 1 GROUND RETURN 48 VDC POWER DISTRIBUTION SHELF REAR VIEW C...

Page 82: ... attached to the terminal block Tighten the screws 4 Connect the 48 Vdc supply lead to the negative terminal and the return lead to the positive terminal 5 Connect the other end of the input power wires to the proper terminals at the power source or distribution panel in the central office Observe the correct polarities when connecting these wires Measure the power and ground to verify that the po...

Page 83: ...s the cables to the left side If the cabling is from the ceiling drop the cabling to the top of the cabinet frame 2 Insert the ATIC or DID TIC cable end connector into the TIC1 connector on the main backplane Repeat for all other pertinent telephone connectors For a dual cabinet XC1000 repeat for cabinet 2 3 Tie the cables across the top frame of the cabinet 4 Tie the cables to the rails of the ra...

Page 84: ...alled in the future dress the cables to the left side If the cabling is from the ceiling drop the cabling to the top of the cabinet frame 2 Insert the E M TIC cable end connector into the TIC1 connector on the main backplane Repeat for all other pertinent telephone connectors If a dual cabinet XC1000 repeat for cabinet 2 3 Tie the cables across the top frame of the cabinet 4 Tie the cables to the ...

Page 85: ...connector into the TIC1 connector on the main backplane Repeat for all other pertinent telephone connectors For a dual cabinet XC1000 repeat for cabinet 2 3 Tie the cables across the top frame of the cabinet 4 Tie the cables to the rails of the rack up to the ceiling or down to the floor depending on the cable routing 3 7 4 E1 TIC and PTIC Telephone Connections The trunk cables and connectors for ...

Page 86: ...from the ceiling drop the cabling to the top of the cabinet frame Tie the cables across the top frame of the cabinet then tie the cables to the rails of the rack up to the ceiling or down to the floor depending on the cable routing 2 Attach a static grounding wrist strap 3 If a 75 ohm coaxial connection is used connect the transmit and receive cables to the P2 and P3 coaxial connectors respectivel...

Page 87: ...TOOTH LOCKWASHER 2X FLAT WASHER SCREW 4 40 BY 11 4 INCH 2X 2X CABLE CLAMP 6 SCREW SPACER FLAT WASHER TOP INTERNAL TOOTH LOCKWASHER 2X FLAT WASHER 2X a 75 ohm adapter P N 044 2059 000 b 120 ohm adapter P N 044 2059 001 SCREW 6 32 BY 3 8 INCH SCREW 4 40 BY 11 4 INCH 2X Figure 3 12 Adapter Boards for the E1 TIC and PTIC SECTION 3 7 ...

Page 88: ... the data link ports the switching control center system SCCS the X 25 the external alarms and the RDAC ports connect to the main distribution board on cabinet 1 Make sure to connect the correct cable to the correct connector on the distribution board Figure 3 13 shows the main distribution board with the pertinent connectors identified CONNECTOR J25 J43 J44 J45 J46 J47 J48 J49 J50 EXTERNALALARMS ...

Page 89: ...ral options are available with the XC1000 including the asynch ronous communications processor ACP and the busy out controller The ACP card allows a single XC1000 platform to support multiple asynch ronous data link connections The busy out controller is an encased relay apparatus that is installed in the lower left corner of cabinet 1 of a single or dual cabinet XC1000 3 9 1 ACP I O Distribution ...

Page 90: ...3 2 1 0 ACP DISTRIBUTION 15 14 13 9 8 7 6 5 ACP I O DISTRIBUTION BOARD 1 INTEGRATION DATA LINK CONNECTIONS LINKS 1 5 11 12 AND 13 INTEGRATION DATA LINK CONNECTIONS LINKS 6 10 14 15 AND 16 ACP I O DISTRIBUTION BOARD 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Figure 3 14 ACP I O Distribution Board Port Assignments SECTION 3 9 ...

Page 91: ... CTS 6 2 J103 TxD RxD DCD RTS and CTS 7 2 J104 TxD RxD DCD RTS and CTS 8 2 J105 TxD RxD and DCD 9 2 J106 TxD RxD and DCD 10 2 J107 TxD RxD and DCD 11 1 J108 TxD RxD and DCD 12 1 J109 TxD RxD and DCD 13 1 J110 TxD RxD and DCD 14 2 J108 TxD RxD and DCD 15 2 J109 TxD RxD and DCD 16 2 J110 TxD RxD and DCD 1 J111 J118 Reserved TxD and RxD Table 3 3 The MTA Connections on ACP I O Distribution Board 2 MT...

Page 92: ...0 and the AT T Teletype 4425 or 5425 This installation procedure applies to the HP 700 43 only For information about installing other terminals refer to their specific manufacturer s manuals An optional printer can be used with the SMT to provide hard copy records of system menus statistics distribu tion lists usage reports and maintenance information 3 10 1 SMT Installation The SMT is usually loc...

Page 93: ...epresentative Perform the following steps to install either of the supported printers 1 If the printer has not been unpacked carefully remove the printer from its container Save all packing materials in case the printer must be returned For specific instructions about unpacking and the physical setup of the printer refer to the supplied printer user manual 2 Place the printer next to the SMT on a ...

Page 94: ...tandby redundancy feature is installed The settings of configuration switches on certain logic cards must be verified for specific system requirements The locations of the TICs and DLCs in specific line card groups and in the specific logic bay slots also need to be verified Figure 3 16 shows the logic bay slots for TICs DLCs and common control cards for both redundant and nonredundant XC1000s Do ...

Page 95: ... or unsed TIC12 or unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused LINE CARD LINE CARD LINE CARD CABINET 1 CABINET 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 System File Card A System File Card B Message File Card A Message FIle Card B Monitor ACP TIC1 DLC TIC2 or unused DLC TIC3 DLC TIC4 or unused DLC TIC5 DLC DLC TIC7 DLC DLC TIC9 DLC DL...

Page 96: ...MMON CONTROL CARDS GROUP 4 GROUP 5 GROUP 6 SLOT NUMBER PHYSICAL MESSAGE FILE CARD MONITOR CARD CPU ACP ATIC OR DID TIC DLC DLC DLC DLC DLC DLC DLC DLC DLC DLC DLC DLC ATIC OR DID TIC ATIC OR DID TIC ATIC OR DID TIC ATIC OR DID TIC ATIC OR DID TIC ATIC OR DID TIC ATIC OR DID TIC ATIC OR DID TIC ATIC OR DID TIC ATIC OR DID TIC ATIC OR DID TIC Figure 3 17 ATIC or DID TIC and DLC Logic Bay Slot Locati...

Page 97: ... 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 SYSTEM FILE CARD COMMON CONTROL CARDS LINE CARD GROUP 1 LINE CARD GROUP 2 LINE CARD GROUP 3 COMMON CONTROL CARDS GROUP 4 GROUP 5 GROUP 6 SLOT NUMBER PHYSICAL MESSAGE FILE CARD MONITOR CARD CPU ACP E M TIC DLC DLC DLC DLC DLC DLC DLC DLC DLC DLC DLC DLC E M TIC E M TIC E M TIC E M TIC E M TIC E M TIC E M...

Page 98: ...span Figure 3 19 shows the T1 TIC and DLC locations in the logic bay slots LINE CARD LINE CARD LINE CARD CABINET 1 CABINET 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 SYSTEM FILE CARD COMMON CONTROL CARDS LINE CARD GROUP 1 LINE CARD GROUP 2 LINE CARD GROUP 3 COMMON CONTROL CARDS GROUP 4 GROUP 5 GROUP 6 SLOT NUMBER PHYSICAL MESSAGE FILE CARD ...

Page 99: ...loopback placing the jumper across pins 2 and 3 ON enables PCM loopback The jumper must be across pins 1 and 2 OFF for normal operation If there is no jumper J2 defaults to OFF 4 Set the line length switches 1 8 for the appropriate configuration on the T1 TIC Figure 3 20 The switches allow the length of the line between the XC1000 and the T1 span terminating equipment to be configured to support f...

Page 100: ... E1 TICs are required use slots 7 11 and 15 In cabinet 2 of a dual cabinet XC1000 start with slot 25 LINE CARD LINE CARD LINE CARD CABINET 1 CABINET 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 SYSTEM FILE CARD COMMON CONTROL CARDS LINE CARD GROUP 1 LINE CARD GROUP 2 LINE CARD GROUP 3 COMMON CONTROL CARDS GROUP 4 GROUP 5 GROUP 6 SLOT NUMBER P...

Page 101: ...n of Switches and Jumpers on the E1 TIC Table 3 8 E1 TIC Termination Connection Configuration Switch Designation Switch Settings Designation 1 2 3 4 120 Ohm Coaxial Connection U7B OFF OFF ON ON U3D OFF OFF OFF OFF U8F OFF OFF OFF OFF 75 Ohm Coaxial Connection U7B ON ON OFF OFF U3D OFF OFF OFF OFF U8F OFF OFF OFF OFF SECTION 3 11 ...

Page 102: ...binet XC1000 if a single PTIC is required install it in slot 7 If two PTICs are required use slots 7 and 11 If three PTICs are required use slots 7 11 and 15 For cabinet 2 in a dual cabinet XC1000 start with slot 25 Perform the following steps to configure the PTIC 1 The PTIC is configured at the factory for 120 ohm E1 mode operation Verify that the dip switches on the PTIC are set correctly Refer...

Page 103: ...0D ON OFF ON ON U11S OFF OFF ON OFF U12S OFF OFF ON OFF U9X ON OFF OFF OFF U6Xa ON OFF ON OFF T1 Mode at 110 Ohmsb U32L OFF OFF OFF OFF U30D ON OFF ON ON U11S OFF ON OFF ON U12S OFF ON OFF ON U9X ON OFF OFF OFF U6X OFF OFF OFF OFF a In some cases setting all the U6X switches to ON allows better performance b PTICs using T1 mode have different components than PTICs using E1 mode they are not interc...

Page 104: ...and should be set for 8 MB S1 Figure 3 24 F10 and F20 File Card Memory Configuration Switch Settings on S1 Before installing the F20 system and message file cards verify that the memory configuration switches S1 located near the connector are set as shown in Figure 3 26 and that the diagnostic configuration switches S2 located above the memory switches are all in the OFF position 3 11 7 CPU Config...

Page 105: ...nging EPROMs With Software Upgrades Before installing a C10 CPU that has been upgraded to 16 MB verify that the dip switches are set properly for 16 MB as shown in Figure 3 26 S1 Figure 3 26 C10 CPU Memory Configuration Switch Settings for 16 MB The C20 CPU P N 244 2053 011 replaces the C20 CPU P N 244 2053 010 It is an enhanced version of the C10 CPU P N 244 2004 001 8 MB or the C10 CPU P N 244 2...

Page 106: ...ese switches enable or disable the OOS SA and NSA remote alarms 3 12 SETTING DISTRIBUTION BOARD CONFIGURATION SWITCHES The distribution board has two locations S1 and S2 that are used to configure the external alarms Figure 3 29 shows the location of the switches on the main distribution board Figure 3 28 Monitor Card Showing the Audible Alarm Configuration Switches SECTION 3 11 3 12 ...

Page 107: ... a nonredundant XC1000 or to ON for a redundant XC1000 The hardware configuration is set by 10 dip switches located on S2 These switches indicate to the monitor card which alarm status lines are active and should be monitored Switches are set at the factory and do not need to be changed unless the XC1000 is reconfigured at a later time Verify that the S2 switches are set for the correct configurat...

Page 108: ...L FEATURES If the optional ACP feature or the busy out controller feature is installed make sure that the configuration switches are set correctly The configuration switch settings for each feature are described in sections 3 13 1 and 3 13 2 3 13 1 ACP Card Configuration The ACP card has three sets of dip switches for configuring the card Table 3 13 lists the settings at each switch location U2E i...

Page 109: ...chdog timer should be enabled If disabled no CPU OFF Timer disabled If disabled no CPU error checking for busy out controller 7 8 Restore timer 7 OFF 8 OFF 15 min delay Switches set the time interval that timer waits before restoring scan points 7 ON 8 OFF 12 min delay restoring scan points to normal after power outage Set the XC1000 with OOS control to 6 7 OFF 8 ON 9 min delay OOS control to 6 mi...

Page 110: ...g a hooded 25 pair male Amphenol type connector 2 Connect one end of the DB25 cable to the RS 232 C connector on the RDAC Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled DATACOMM on the HP 700 43 terminal 3 Attach the 267A adapter to the RJ 11 connector on the telephone 4 Connect a standard telephone cord from the 267A adapter to the connector labeled PSTN on the RDAC 5 To determine whether...

Page 111: ...uipment must be reported to Octel and the shipper The XC1000 cabinet is installed on the floor mounts prepared during the site preparation stage and all external cabling is connected All internal connections must be checked to ensure that they are firmly attached and that they are correct All the logic cards and the PCBs within the XC1000 must be checked to ensure that their switch settings and co...

Page 112: ...4 STARTUP AND INITIALIZATION ...

Page 113: ...rameters 4 11 4 2 5 2 Setting Wyse 50 SMT Parameters 4 15 4 2 5 3 Setting DEC VT102 and VT220 SMT Parameters 4 16 4 3 MONITORING STARTUP DIAGNOSTICS 4 18 4 3 1 Starting Up the XC1000 4 18 4 3 2 Monitoring the CPU Diagnostic Tests 4 18 4 3 3 Checking the File Card Status 4 21 4 3 3 1 Offset 00 4 21 4 3 3 2 Offsets 01 and 04 4 22 4 3 4 Selecting the Terminal Type 4 23 4 3 5 Completing the Boot Proce...

Page 114: ...ransfer Outcall and Pager Sequences 4 44 4 8 2 Achieving In Band Integration 4 48 4 8 3 Configuring CPU Serial Channels Menu 6 3 4 49 4 8 3 1 SMT Channel Configuration 4 51 4 8 3 2 CPU Channel Configuration for Direct Integration 4 52 4 8 4 Configuring MTA Channels Menu 6 4 4 52 4 8 5 Managing Integration Links Menu 6 5 4 54 4 8 5 1 ACP Integration Link Additions 4 54 4 8 5 2 Integration Link Chan...

Page 115: ... 4 50 FIGURES Figure 4 1 XC1000 Startup and Initialization Procedures 4 1 Figure 4 2 Printer Control Panel 4 5 Figure 4 3 Printout of Printer Setup Mode 4 6 Figure 4 4 Printout of the Printer Setup Parameters 4 7 Figure 4 5 Control Panel on the Okidata ML320 Printer 4 9 Figure 4 6 HP 700 43 Setup Mode Screen 4 11 Figure 4 7 HP 700 43 User Setup Menu 4 12 Figure 4 8 HP 700 43 System Setup Menu 4 13...

Page 116: ...f Menu 0 Current Date and Time Menu 0 3 4 34 Figure 4 23 Menu 4 Ports Assignments 4 35 Figure 4 24 Example of a Completed Menu 4 1 Screen for Ports 1A Through 2L 4 36 Figure 4 25 Main Menu 4 40 Figure 4 26 First Screen of Menu 1 System Parameters 4 41 Figure 4 27 Second Screen of Menu 1 Installation Information Menu 1 1 4 42 Figure 4 28 First Screen of Menu 6 Showing Five Options 4 43 Figure 4 29 ...

Page 117: ...MPLETE MENUS 0 AND 4 ACCESS THE MAIN MENU CHANGE INSTALLATION INFORMATION ESTABLISH DIALING AND SERIAL CHANNEL PARAMETERS VERIFY XC1000 OPERATION Figure 4 1 XC1000 Startup and Initialization Procedures 4 2 INITIALIZING THE SMT XC1000 supports several terminals that can function as the primary SMT Select the terminal type at first time boot Normally Octel configures XC1000 to operate with the custo...

Page 118: ...tered on the keyboard as lower case or all capitals The procedures throughout this manual indicate when to press the Enter key to execute a command The Return and Enter keys on different keyboards perform the same function The following conventions are used in this manual for keyboard entries The Ctrl key is always pressed and held down until another key is pressed at which time both keys are rele...

Page 119: ...r keys For example to print multiple screens press and hold down the Ctrl key then the Shift key then press the Print Pg key Press and hold down the Ctrl key and then press the C key C to stop printing a report Cursor keys Using the HP 700 43 or Wyse 50 cursor keys with XC1000 differs from the manner in which cursor keys are ordinarily used Make sure to become familiar with XC1000 s cursor usage A...

Page 120: ... are again pressed Send key Press the SEND key Print Send key on the Wyse 50 to send information on the screen to the XC1000 and update XC1000 records The SEND key operates regardless of the current field position of the cursor Use the SEND key for a number of functions Press SEND and the XC1000 immediately stores all data on the screen except when a confirmation is required to execute a change or...

Page 121: ...meters for the Fujitsu DL1200 printer 1 Make sure that power to the printer is off 2 While pressing the MODE button on the printer control panel turn on the printer power Continue pressing the MODE button until the printer beeps If the printer does not beep and the printer goes on line the printer is not in setup mode Repeat steps 1 and 2 Figure 4 2 shows the printer control panel and the location...

Page 122: ...r select the LIST option The printer prints out the current printer parameters Figure 4 4 shows an example of a printout of printer setup parameters 6 If the printer parameters do not match the setup parameters printed set them accordingly 7 Turn the printer off 8 Turn the power to the printer on while pressing FF The printer enters continuous self test mode Check that the printer prints properly ...

Page 123: ...L DRAFT DRAFT PANEL FONT1 COUR 10 PANEL F1PITCH 10 CPI PANEL FONT2 PRSTG12 PANEL F2PITCH 12 CPI PANEL END Top of form settings Func Item Option TOF ADJ ORIGIN 1 INCH TOF ADJ FINEADJ 0 TOF ADJ END Hardware settings Func Item Option HARDWRE PPR OUT CNT ONLY HARDWRE PRT DIR BI DIR HARDWRE BUZZER ON HARDWRE WORD LG 8 BIT HARDWRE BUFFER 24KBYTE HARDWRE FEEDER REAR HARDWRE FORMAT 8NONE 1 HARDWRE BAUD RT...

Page 124: ...e the new width value 7 Turn the printer back on The printer is now ready for printing on wide paper To return the printer to normal operation return to the printer offline setup mode and repeat steps 3 through 7 to reset the width to 8 0 4 2 3 2 Printing in Condensed Print Mode Perform the following steps to print in condensed print mode 1 Turn the printer off 2 Press MODE while turning the print...

Page 125: ...EED FEED PARK TOF ALARM GROUP CHARACTER PITCH ITEM SET PRINT MENU PRINT QUALITY HSD QUIET POWER NLQ UTL 10 12 17 20 PROP Figure 4 5 Control Panel on the Okidata ML320 Printer 3 Press the PRINT button The current parameter settings are printed Table 4 2 lists the parameter settings for the ML320 printer The parameters that differ from the default settings are shown in boldface Table 4 2 Examples of...

Page 126: ...ime 200 ms 4 Press the GROUP button to select the general control group The first item Emulation Mode is selected automatically Press the SET button to reset the Emulation Mode to EPSON FXe 5 Press the GROUP button three times to select the Serial I F Option group Press the ITEM button twice to select the Protocol item Press the SET button to reset the Protocol option to X on X off 6 Press the ITE...

Page 127: ...nch is selected To return to normal printing select 10 or 12 4 2 5 Establishing Communication Parameters Six communication parameters are critical between the SMT and XC1000 Whichever terminal type is used the parameters must be set as follows Baud rate 9600 1200 Data packet length 8 Parity bit none Stop bits 1 Communication full duplex Communication protocol xon xoff Printer communication setting...

Page 128: ...he list of possible parameter selections Pressing the space bar can also display the next choice Saves the currently displayed values These values are activated after exiting setup mode All values except the following are activated when the terminal is powered on or reset Time Hour Minute Block Mode Status Line Protect Mode Monitor Mode Graph Mode Bgnd Attr EOM Char Block Term and Aux Mode Display...

Page 129: ...T CHOICE PREVIOUS CHOICE SHOW DEFAULTS SHOW ACTIVE SHOW POWER ON previous menu next menu f 1 f 2 f 3 f 4 f 5 f 6 f 7 f 8 XX XX Screen Width Compatibility Auto Scroll Block Mode Multipage Enhance Mode Auto Linefeed Protect Mode Auto Page Lead in Char Auto Wrap Attr Extent EOM Char Monitor Mode Bgnd Attr Block Term Graph Mode System Setup A F K P B G L Q C H M D I N E J O 80 WY 30 50 On Character Of...

Page 130: ... 700 43 Operating Parameters for the Main and Auxiliary Port 10 Confirm that the remaining operating parameters displayed on the screen match those in Figure 4 9 If the parameters are not the same use the procedures shown in step 4 to move to the incorrect field and press the space bar or F2 until the correct value appears Refer to Table 4 3 for descriptions of the function keys displayed at the b...

Page 131: ...nications This section provides the setup procedure for a Wyse 50 terminal for operation with XC1000 At initial startup the terminal uses default settings Change these default settings to those required for the Wyse 50 if necessary Perform the following steps to configure the Wyse 50 terminal 1 Turn the Wyse 50 terminal on The cursor appears in the upper left hand corner of the screen 2 Press the ...

Page 132: ...MT although the DEC terminals are not supplied by Octel Communications This section provides setup procedures for the DEC terminals to operate with XC1000 At initial startup SMT uses default settings If changes are required for the type of terminal change these default settings as follows 1 Turn on the terminal and adjust the screen intensity 2 Press the SET UP key to enter the setup screens Enter...

Page 133: ...at key on 0 Screen dark 1 Block cursor Switch 2 0011 0 Margin bell off 0 Keyclick off 1 ANSI standards 1 Auto XON XOFF on Switch 3 0000 0 U S character set 0 Autowrap off 0 Line feed new line off 0 Local echo off Switch 4 1100 1 Form feed termination print character FF 1 Full screen print 0 One stop bit 0 Ignore receive parity Switch 5 1010 1 Break key on 0 Disconnect character disabled 1 Other di...

Page 134: ...ion with the SMT which displays the progress of the startup Section 6 2 describes startup fault isolation 4 3 1 Starting Up the XC1000 Perform the following steps to start up the XC1000 1 Make sure that there is power to the XC1000 by checking the power source that leads to the XC1000 2 Remove the breaker cover from the power distribution shelf to view the breakers 3 Make sure that the 5 Vdc 12 Vd...

Page 135: ...ecute from Dynamic RAM 09 PASSED Test DRAM while Executing from DRAM 0A PASSED 82370 380 DMA Byte Transfer 0B PASSED 82370 380 DMA Block Transfer 0C PASSED SBI Controller RAM 0D PASSED SBI Controller Loopback 0E PASSED SBI Controller Threshold 0F PASSED SBI Controller RAM DMA 10 PASSED 8530 SCC HDLC Text 3A PASSED Standby Cards Test 44 PASSED Please select from the following B Boot the System DB B...

Page 136: ...ION Booted from CPU A Boot Reason Power Failure Shutdown Reason N A CPU Switchover after Normal System Shutdown NO CPU Switchover after Abnormal System Shutdown YES SRAM 00 ENTER BOOT COMMAND A IPL2 EXTENSION VERSION 324500 0 Uploading message file card File card 2 uploading OK Synchronizing with uploaded S W File card 2 Bootstrapped OK PRIMARY FILE CARD STATUS 00 03 00 03 00 00 00 43 07 01 SECOND...

Page 137: ...messages are described in sections 4 3 3 1 and 4 3 3 2 4 3 3 1 Offset 00 File card status messages which indicate the operational status of the system primary or message secondary drives is represented in 10 hexadecimal bytes The position of each byte or offset is determined by counting from the left starting with zero Table 4 6 presents a brief description of the bytes in each offset Table 4 6 Pr...

Page 138: ...ode 4 3 3 2 Offsets 01 Through 04 Offsets 01 and 02 and offsets 03 and 04 for the system file card report the number of system drives that are running and installed respectively in transposed hexadecimal bytes The system file card reads the number of system drives that should be running from the install table on system drive 0 The bytes at offsets 01 and 02 in the PRIMARY FILE CARD STATUS field re...

Page 139: ...he bottom of the screen because the terminal type has not yet been selected Invalid terminal type select terminal type using utilities Press any key to continue Set up the terminal parameters as follows 1 At the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt type DR and the TERMINAL SELECTION OPTIONS screen appears as shown in Figure 4 15 TERMINAL SELECTION OPTIONS 1 WYSE OR HP 2 AT T TELETYPE 4425 5425 3 VT100 X EXIT...

Page 140: ... that must be corrected before booting XC1000 Refer immediately to section 6 2 4 for procedures to correct the problem Caution 1 Verify that the primary and secondary file card statuses report either 00 or 03 at offset 00 or the XC1000 cannot boot After the secondary file card status is displayed IPL3 program loading information appears the screen goes blank and then displays the line configuratio...

Page 141: ...6E 6F 6G 6H 6I 6J 6K 6L HARD 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 SOFT 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B TIC 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 PRESS ANY KEY TO PAUSE Second TIC screen follows TOTAL LINES FOUND 144 LOAD OPERATING SYSTEM OK OPERATING SYSTEM SUCCESSFULLY LOADED Software Rele...

Page 142: ...hannel Refer to Figure 4 16 for an example of the line configuration test The terminal displays the results of the DLC configuration test for each port in four rows labeled LINE HARD SOFT and TIC The entries for each port are in hexadecimal bytes A port failure or a port not installed appears as a dash on the screen The LINE rows provide the port number reference in sequence from 1A to 6L for a si...

Page 143: ...lay shown in Figure 4 17 ends with the prompt Have you com pleted every step in the upgrade or initialization procedure to this point Y N Enter Y and the screen display scrolls to the information shown in Figure 4 18 In the confirming prompt shown in Figure 4 18 enter Y to proceed NEW DATA DIRECTORY WILL BE INITIALIZED ANY PREVIOUS DATA IN IT WILL BE LOST ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO DO THIS Y N Y CRE...

Page 144: ...numbers can be from 3 to 10 digits long This number is selected during the menu 0 procedures and must be selected carefully because it is difficult to change Once set the mailbox number lengths can only be increased Only a certified service person can change this parameter which must be done while XC1000 is out of service Menu 0 comprises four screens containing the following information Company i...

Page 145: ... when the cursor is in the last field 4 4 2 Entering XC1000 Information Complete the data entry fields in the second screen of menu 0 which is also known as menu 0 1 Figure 4 20 shows an example of menu 0 1 Menu 0 First Time Setup VPMOD VPMOD Serial Number Number of digits in a mailbox number VPMOD s phone number include area code Ext Saved Messages Keep Date Time Stamp of When the Message was Rec...

Page 146: ... lengthened or variable length mailbox addresses can also be defined using an express or alias address Refer to the XC1000 System Manager Manual for information about express address and alias address 4 Enter the XC1000 s telephone number also known as the access number in the VPMOD s phone number include area code field The format requires a 3 digit area code in parentheses followed by the 7 digi...

Page 147: ...configuration note or contact the Octel Communications Technical Assistance Center 9 Enter a digit between 2 and 10 in the Number of Digits in an Extension Used for Outcalling and ECP field This entry must equal the number of digits that the XC1000 dials to call a telephone number on the switch or Centrex This number must also equal the number of digits in the telephone number used by the XC1000 t...

Page 148: ...3 Assigning System Manager Information The third screen of menu 0 is also known as menu 0 2 Menu 0 2 contains information specific to the primary and secondary system managers Figure 4 21 shows an example of menu 0 2 Enter information in the fields in this menu as discussed in sections 4 4 3 1 and 4 4 3 2 Menu 0 First Time Setup System Managers Primary System Manager Name Mailbox Number Initial Ma...

Page 149: ...e first and second digits Beginning a password with a zero can prevent initialization of the system manager s mailbox but it does not affect entering the terminal screens The XC1000 requires a system manager mailbox password before it allows a system manager access to the SMT If both mailbox passwords are lost access is denied To gain access the system must be reinitialized The database and all me...

Page 150: ... tone telephone 4 Press the Enter key when menu 0 2 is completed and the fourth screen of menu 0 appears 4 4 4 Entering Current Date and Time Figure 4 22 shows an example of the fourth screen of menu 0 Menu 0 First Time Setup Current Date Current Time Figure 4 22 Fourth Screen of Menu 0 Current Date and Time Menu 0 3 Perform the following steps to complete the screen 1 In the Current Date field en...

Page 151: ...on the screen Loading System Tables Please Wait Port first port Line type is not valid for the type of PBX System is connected to Press any key to continue Press any key and the first screen of menu 4 appears 4 5 ESTABLISHING LINE TYPES AND PORT ASSIGNMENTS The first screen of Menu 4 Port Assignments has six options for the 144 available XC1000 ports as shown in Figure 4 23 Enter new information b...

Page 152: ...s are the same except that the port numbers differ Only the line types and the number of digits in a forwarded call must be entered in menu 4 at this stage The remaining data can be entered by accessing menu 4 again after completing menus 1 2 and 3 However information for all of the columns in menu 4 is presented here 4 5 1 Assigning Line Types The line types allow the XC1000 to set certain intern...

Page 153: ...te start 2 wires 88 In band E M DTMF 600 ohms wink start 2 wires 89 In band E M DTMF 900 ohms wink start 4 wires 90 In band E M DTMF 900 ohms wink start 2 wires 91 Generic T1 DTMF loop start dial tone disconnect 92 Generic T1 DTMF ground start dial tone disconnect 93 In band T1 DTMF immediate start 4 wires 94 In band T1 DTMF wink start 4 wires 95 T1 loop start with SMDI 96 T1 ground start with SMD...

Page 154: ...nward dial DID trunks or generic in band integration When calls are forwarded to XC1000 over a standard E M tie line XC1000 receives digits from the switch that identify the telephone number of the called party The same is true when XC1000 uses generic in band integration Make entries in the D column as follows 1 In the first D field enter the number of digits received This could include DTMF code...

Page 155: ...ephone answering capability of XC1000 Menu 4 allows or denies incoming access by nonsubscribers Enter a Y in column T to allow nonsubscribers access to a specific port This is used for receiving busy and ring no answer forwarded calls routed to the personal greetings of subscribers If a Y has been entered in column T then a Y must be entered in the I column Enter N to deny access to nonsubscribers...

Page 156: ...s any key to display the password prompt then enter one of the system manager passwords The password is not displayed this information was written down or memorized when it was assigned in menu 0 2 First Time Setup The Main Menu is the directory for all the XC1000 functions as shown in Figure 4 25 Main Menu System Management 11 System Distribution Lists 12 Disk Management 13 System Maintenance 14 ...

Page 157: ... system manager 4 7 CHANGING INSTALLATION INFORMATION Even though most of the minimum programming has already been com pleted it is sometimes necessary to change installation information If this is necessary select 1 from the Main Menu Menu 1 System Parameters appears on the screen as shown in Figure 4 26 Menu 1 System Parameters Enter Option 1 Change Installation Information 2 Change Configuratio...

Page 158: ...Date Time Stamp of When The Message was Received ACP Used for Integration 2 In the Number of Rings for Local and Long Distance Calls Used for Outcalls field enter the number of rings allowed for outcalling before XC1000 considers the outcall unanswered and disconnects The maximum number allowed is 20 This field determines the number of rings for outcalls to a local 7 digit or long distance 10 digi...

Page 159: ...es not seek calling party identification as all calls left in telephone answering mode are from outside callers Enter 2 if XC1000 should use the calling party identification provided by the switch This feature allows subscribers to reply to telephone answering messages if 1 the message originator has a telephone number on the switch and a corresponding mailbox in XC1000 and 2 the switch is integra...

Page 160: ...aling Sequence for Local Calls Dialing Sequence for Long Distance Calls Pager Dialing Sequences 1 2 3 4 5 6 Ring No Answer Busy Figure 4 29 Second Screen of Menu 6 Transfer Outcall and Pager Dialing Sequences Menu 6 1 All switches associated with a single XC1000 must all have the same dialing sequences entered in the dialing sequence fields Caution 2 Confirm the default value of 500 milliseconds 1...

Page 161: ...s However the AT T 5ESS for example uses separate dialing sequences that require the system manager to complete both fields The default settings are F for both entries enter the appropriate sequence instead of these defaults if applicable Refer to the appropriate configuration note for details 6 Enter N telephone number in the Dialing Sequence for On PBX Calls if VPMOD is on a PBX field The XC1000...

Page 162: ...serted The Dialing Sequence for Private Network Calls field is used for replying to an AMIS message Initiating an AMIS message to a private network desti nation requires information from the dialing sequence table established in menu 15 2 10 Enter up to six different pager dialing sequences in the Pager Dialing Sequence fields These sequences comprise a series of commands that allow XC1000 to comm...

Page 163: ...ization Code XC1000 sends the digits entered in the Outcalling Authorization Code field in the mailbox profile menus 8 and 9 1 The C code is used to display a mailbox number on a display pager The code can be used as either a CO switch authorization code for switches that require codes for outcalling access or a pager iden tification code Some paging services require the caller to enter a number t...

Page 164: ...prompt to play with the pager holder hearing that XC1000 has initiated the page 4 8 2 Achieving In Band Integration The second submenu of menu 6 shown in Figure 4 30 is also known as menu 6 2 It is used to specify digit sequences received or sent by XC1000 to achieve in band integration with a switch Menu 6 Dialing Parameters In band Integration Maximum Time Before First Digit Received millisecond...

Page 165: ... field under most circumstances Enter an N only if the switch cannot process at the speed at which XC1000 normally sends in band refresh message waiting commands after system boot If N is entered the message waiting indication is refreshed but at a slower rate 5 In the Digit Sequence for Direct Calls field enter a sequence that can include the digits 0 through 9 X for each irrelevant digit and N f...

Page 166: ...Type Console 1 2 3 4 Service Y Service Y SMT SMT Channel Number To Be Defined 1 Channel Type 1 System Terminal CPU Baud Rate Type of Terminal on This Channel Press the Send key to save changes Figure 4 31 Example of Menu 6 3 Define CPU Serial Channel 2 Enter a valid channel number in the Channel Number To Be Defined field and additional fields appear on the screen depending on the entry in the Cha...

Page 167: ... Service is shown in the Active Type column for channel 4 channel 4 is also used for the primary SMT To configure terminals from menu 6 3 Figure 4 31 perform the following steps 1 In the Channel Number To Be Defined field enter 1 through 4 If channel number 4 is selected the channel type cannot be changed 2 In the Channel Type field enter 1 2 or 4 from the following list 1 System Terminal 2 PC bas...

Page 168: ...c menu 6 and press the Return key Menu 6 3 appears on the screen Figure 4 31 The CPU channel number that appears in the Channel column corresponds to the connector on the main distribution board that is used for each function refer to Table 4 9 To configure a CPU channel for integration from menu 6 3 perform the following steps 1 In the Channel Number To Be Defined field enter 1 through 4 2 In the...

Page 169: ...ected for the channel type in menu 6 3 a prompt appears at the bottom of the screen stating that the MTA channels must be configured in menu 6 4 All fields can be configured for ACP based terminals but only the Menu Access Allowed this Termi nal fields can be configured for PC based terminals Configure the MTA channels for ACP based terminals as follows 1 From menu 6 select option 4 for MTA parame...

Page 170: ...inal cannot access These fields can also be changed for a PC based MTA Repeat these steps for all ACP based MTA channels Select option 4 from menu 6 then option 2 from menu 6 4 to review a summary of the entries created in the previous menu 4 8 5 Managing Integration Links Menu 6 5 Configure the integration link using menu 6 5 From menu 6 Figure 4 28 select option 5 to display the Integration Link...

Page 171: ...rated field enter one of the following referring to the applicable integration configuration note 1 None used with 1MB WATS DID and in band integrations 2 Other used if options 1 3 or 9 do not apply 3 Centrex 1AESS SMDI full duplex 9 Centrex 1AESS SMDI half duplex After this field is completed the remaining fields appear 5 In the Baud Rate field select one of the following 0 1200 baud 1 2400 baud ...

Page 172: ...rrier Detect Not Used Extension to Check SMDI Message Waiting 5999 Menu 6 Dialing and Serial Channel Parameters Add Integration Link Figure 4 34 Example of a Completed Screen for Menu 6 5 1 4 8 5 2 Integration Link Changes Select option 2 from menu 6 5 to change an integration link Changing an integration link is similar to adding a link as detailed in section 4 8 5 1 The same fields appear in men...

Page 173: ...hird screen 5 Type C to clear the statistics or press the Enter key to return to the first screen 4 9 VERIFYING XC1000 OPERATION Use the checklists in sections 4 9 1 through 4 9 4 to ensure that the XC1000 has been installed and is operating correctly The installer must set up a few basic features such as dialing parameters and a mailbox to check the operation of XC1000 4 9 1 Testing the Printer T...

Page 174: ...nter a mailbox number that corresponds to the telephone number with the number of digits matching that established in menu 0 b Enter a name for the mailbox such as Test c Enter 1234567890 for the initial password 5 Place a call to XC1000 and initialize the test mailbox Keep 1234567890 as the password to test all the DTMF tones 6 Dial the number for each port to perform a port to port check Perform...

Page 175: ...menus 1 2 3 and 5 4 Enter menus 1 through 6 and their submenus and print each one Save the printouts for future reference 4 10 HIGHLIGHTS The procedures for starting up and initializing the XC1000 include loading the software and configuring the system SMT and printer parameters are determined according to the terminal type the HP 700 43 Wyse 50 DEC VT102 or DEC VT220 The complete initial boot pro...

Page 176: ...arms and their indications are provided External diagnostic tools include external alarms the RDAC and the SCCS interface The status log is used by both system managers and service engineers Chapter Seven provides detailed information about the most important status codes and how to interpret them Chapter Eight details procedures for replacing malfunctioning components These procedures include rep...

Page 177: ...5 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ...

Page 178: ...STING PORTS 5 10 5 6 MEASURING POWER AND GROUND 5 11 5 7 INSPECTING AND CLEANING 5 12 5 8 STORING AND HANDLING DISK DRIVES 5 15 5 9 HIGHLIGHTS 5 16 TABLE Table 5 1 Recommended Frequency of Routine Maintenance 5 1 FIGURES Figure 5 1 Menu 13 System Maintenance 5 2 Figure 5 2 Example of Menu 13 8 Review Current Alarm Status for a Dual Cabinet XC1000 5 2 Figure 5 3 COPY OPTIONS Menu 5 8 Figure 5 4 Sys...

Page 179: ... AND THE STATUS LOG Menu 13 8 shows the current alarm status XC1000 sets alarms when there are software or hardware malfunctions in the system The service engineer or system manager should view daily the current alarm status from menu 13 8 and the status log from menu 13 2 These menu options should be printed weekly and filed in a system maintenance notebook Reviewing these printouts can alert the...

Page 180: ...about alarm types When all of the entries have been displayed this prompt appears at the bottom of the screen Current alarm Status display complete Enter P to print current status C to clear software alarms S to disable enable the software alarms or any other key to return to System Maintenance Menu Menu 13 System Maintenance Review Current Alarm Status Cabinet 1 Hardware Alarms T Description Alar...

Page 181: ...arm is not fixed hardware and some software alarms reappear immediately The cause of the alarm must be fixed before these alarms can be cleared 7 From menu 13 select 2 Review Status Log to display the status log which shows entries in chronological order starting with the oldest entry At the end of the status log display this prompt appears Press P to print status log C to clear log or any other k...

Page 182: ...se alarms alert the system manager and service personnel about conditions that affect service for example bad sector alarms on disk drives Voice messages that are in progress or stored could be lost An SA alarm condition can also result in a loss of data that cannot be recovered Out of Service OOS Alarms These alarms alert the system manager and service personnel that XC1000 has shut down and is n...

Page 183: ...e Low is activated when 20 of the status log buffer space remains Entry in Status Log is activated when an NSA condition is recorded in the status log Service Affecting SA Alarms Disk Space Critical is activated when 10 of the message space remains RS 232 Link Failure is activated when the RS 232 link fails CDR Space Critical is activated when 10 of the CDR buffer space remains Status Log Space Cr...

Page 184: ... XC1000 using menu 13 1 1 or 13 1 2 Power Supply Failure is activated when there is a total loss of 5 Vdc or 12 Vdc power An SA alarm is also activated shown in menu 13 8 when XC1000 is rebooted Refer to section 6 3 for information about troubleshooting hardware and software alarm conditions 5 2 3 Reviewing or Scrolling the Status Log The software in XC1000 can detect and report the status of a va...

Page 185: ... operational The backup requires taking XC1000 out of service for about 1 hour Coordinate the shutdown with the system manager in advance Perform the following steps to back up the system drive and switch the cards to the redundant set 1 Log onto the primary SMT 2 Call the Octel Communications Technical Assistance Center and inform them that a backup will be performed Provide the hunt group pilot ...

Page 186: ... in system drive slot S2 10 Turn on the power to XC1000 11 When the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt appears press the Ctrl and D keys simultaneously then type C to enter the COPY OPTIONS menu as shown in Figure 5 3 COPY OPTIONS A SOFTWARE B PHRASES C SYSTEM DATA TABLES USER RECORDS SST SGL COS BTIL D SYSTEM ALL OF THE ABOVE E MESSAGES F ADD BAD SECTOR TO BAD SECTOR TABLE G CLEAR BAD WRITE TABLE H RESET ...

Page 187: ...and press the Enter key to exit the menu 14 When the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt reappears turn off power to the XC1000 15 Remove the backup drive from drive slot S2 and clearly label it as the backup including the date of the backup 16 Turn on the power to the XC1000 17 When the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt reappears press A to boot XC1000 and return it to normal operation 18 Cancel the call forwardin...

Page 188: ...de is now active and the reason for the switchover The ACT and SBY LEDs that were on as noted in step 4 should also be off on that card set and on on the redundant card set 7 Close the front doors of the XC1000 8 From the Main Menu select menu 13 Enter menu 13 8 and clear the current alarm status Enter the status log using option 2 and clear it Do not print the current alarm status and status log ...

Page 189: ...e of the board These test points are labeled TP6 return TP7 5 Vdc and TP8 12 Vdc and are provided for cabinet 2 in a dual cabinet configuration DISTRIBUTION BOARD FOR CABINET 2 ONLY TP8 RETURN TP3 12 VDC J43 J44 J45 J46 J47 J48 J49 J50 TP2 5 VDC TP1 RETURN TP7 5 VDC TP6 12 VDC FOR CABINET 1 S1 S2 Figure 5 5 Main Distribution Board Showing the Location of 5 Vdc and 12 Vdc Test Points Avoid contact ...

Page 190: ...the side of power to the chassis ground The reading should be 0 1 ohm or less 6 Reattach the cover to the power distribution shelf 5 7 INSPECTING AND CLEANING Inspect and clean XC1000 while it is in service For a typical operating environment inspection and cleaning should be performed twice a year Replace filters if soiled Change the frequency or modify the following procedures as required for th...

Page 191: ...lly aligned and the filters on the wide door are horizontally aligned Refer to Figure 5 7 for filter locations ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎ AIR FILTER VERTICAL AIR FILTER HORIZONTAL CABINET FRONT SIERRA CABINET DOORS Figure 5 7 XC1000 Cabinet Doors and Filters 4 Remove the ca...

Page 192: ...d slip into the correct position d Repeat step 7c for three additional filters 8 Close the cabinet doors 9 Repeat steps 3 through 8 for additional cabinets as needed Avoid contact with the 48 Vdc bus bar and terminals when inspecting the cabinet Contact with the 48 Vdc power supply can cause death Danger 10 Open the rear door of each cabinet and visually inspect the exterior of the equipment racks...

Page 193: ... to the components When handling drives use the following precautions Before removing a drive from a XC1000 either attach an antistatic wrist strap or use an equivalent method to provide a high resistance path to ground After a drive is removed immediately place it in an antistatic bag When installing a drive keep the drive in its antistatic bag until ready for use When returning a drive to Octel ...

Page 194: ...ed monthly Power and ground measured monthly Inspection and cleaning performed semiannually XC1000 keeps a record of all system alarms that occur and a status log of all system events After making any significant changes to the configuration the system drive should be backed up If the optional standby redundancy is installed the redundant logic card set should be tested during backup to verify tha...

Page 195: ...6 TROUBLESHOOTING ...

Page 196: ...6 2 4 3 Status Code 20 6 14 6 2 4 4 Status Code 22 6 14 6 2 4 5 Correction of an Incorrectly Seated Drive Module or a Faulty Disk Drive 6 14 6 2 4 6 Drive Serial Number Correction 6 17 6 2 5 DLC Tests 6 18 6 2 6 Line Configuration Tests 6 18 6 2 6 1 SST Loading 6 19 6 2 6 2 Card Configuration Test 6 19 6 2 6 3 Data Bus DMA Test 6 20 6 2 6 4 Line Configuration Test 6 20 6 2 6 5 Load Application Tes...

Page 197: ... 6 3 3 1 Disk Space Low 6 30 6 3 3 2 Status Log Space Low 6 30 6 3 3 3 CDR Space Low 6 30 6 3 3 4 Noncritical Status Log Entry 6 30 6 3 3 5 Yellow Temperature Alarm 6 30 6 3 3 6 Partial Fan Failure 6 31 6 3 3 7 Partial Power Failure 6 31 6 3 4 Alarms Indicated by a Logic Card or Drive LED 6 31 6 4 EXTERNAL DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS 6 32 6 4 1 Remote Alarm Relays 6 33 6 4 2 Remote Diagnostic Administrative ...

Page 198: ...tions 6 30 Table 6 9 J25 Pins Used for Remote Alarms 6 33 Table 6 10 SCCS 68 Byte Status Message Format 6 36 Table 6 11 Alarm Conditions Reported in Bytes 6 17 6 37 FIGURES Figure 6 1 Positive and Negative Power Terminals on the Power Distribution Shelf 6 3 Figure 6 2 Temperature Sensor Board and Wires on the Top of the Card Cage 6 3 Figure 6 3 Terminating Locations of the Temperature Sensors and ...

Page 199: ...d IPL2 6 10 Figure 6 9 Example of Serial Numbers in the Install Table 6 17 Figure 6 10 Example of the IPL3 Screen Showing Line Configurations for a Single Cabinet XC1000 6 19 Figure 6 11 Monitor Card Indicators 6 23 Figure 6 12 Disk Drive LEDs 6 32 Figure 6 13 Main Distribution Board Showing J25 Connector and SCCS Interface 6 33 Page ...

Page 200: ...c card or drive Refer to section 5 2 for information about accessing and printing the current alarm status menu menu 13 8 Audible alarms can also be set External diagnostic tools External diagnostic tools can be accessed remotely for troubleshooting as follows Remote alarm relays Remote diagnostic administrative terminal RDAC Switching control center system SCCS interface Status log entries The so...

Page 201: ... correct any input power problems 1 Open the rear doors on the cabinet 2 Make sure that the XC1000 main circuit breaker is in the OFF position 3 Turn on the power source that leads to the XC1000 Before turning on power to the XC1000 check the voltage Use a digital voltmeter to verify that the power source provides between 43 and 56 Vdc When the positive or red lead of the voltmeter is connected to...

Page 202: ...emperature sensor wires are firmly attached to the temperature sensor board mounted on top of the card cage as shown in Figure 6 2 TEMPERATURE SENSOR BOARD J1 CONNECTOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR MOUNTING P1 CABLE TO DISTRIBUTION BOARD Figure 6 2 Temperature Sensor Board and Wires on the Top of the Card Cage Facing the back of the cabinet the temperature sensor board is located above the main backplane an...

Page 203: ... FAN PLENUM ASSEMBLY Figure 6 3 Terminating Locations of the Temperature Sensors and Wiring From the Distribution Board 4 On the distribution board verify that the temperature sensor wires are securely connected to connector P24 by gently pulling the connector Figure 6 3 5 Verify that the cables connecting the monitor card to the distribution board are correctly installed and are securely attached...

Page 204: ...fy that the wires to the temperature sensor on the back of the assembly are secure then replace the shield 9 Turn on power to the XC1000 10 If the circuit breaker still trips call the Octel Communications Technical Assistance Center 6 2 1 3 Power to Disk Drives and Cooling Fans Power is supplied to the cooling fans and disk drives after the XC1000 is powered on If the cooling fans do not turn on o...

Page 205: ...e not damaged 8 Verify that the drive backplane appears undamaged 9 Turn on power to the XC1000 and then boot the XC1000 Verify that the yellow SEL LEDs on the drive modules flash If the SEL LEDs do not flash turn off the XC1000 power again 10 Verify that the file cards are seated correctly by pushing them into the logic bay 11 Turn on and boot the XC1000 The PWR LED on the front of each file card...

Page 206: ... half duplex j Exit the setup mode and press any key If the key is displayed on the screen the keyboard and monitor are operating correctly k Enter setup mode and change the communications parameter from half duplex to full duplex 3 Verify that the setup parameters are correct for example the SMT baud rate Refer to section 4 2 for the correct setup parameters for the various supported terminals 4 ...

Page 207: ...emory configuration for the C10 CPU as shown in Figure 6 6 S1 Figure 6 6 Memory Configuration Switch Settings on the16 MB C10 CPU The C20 CPU is shipped with 16 MB of memory If the 16 MB C20 CPU is installed verify that the dip switches are set properly for the correct memory configuration as shown in Figure 6 7 S2 Figure 6 7 Memory Configuration Switch Settings on the 16 MB C20 CPU 10 Reseat the ...

Page 208: ...If the message FAILED appears again replace the CPU 6 2 3 File Card Tests The status of the XC1000 and the message file cards are displayed on the SMT after the CPU tests are successfully completed The primary status for the system file card appears before the boot prompt The secondary status for the message file card appears after a boot command is entered In rare cases the CPU cannot communicate...

Page 209: ...stem Type XC1000 PRIMARY FILE CARD STATUS 00 03 00 03 00 00 00 00 00 01 FILE SYSTEM RAM 00 ENTER BOOT COMMAND a Nonredundant XC1000 Initial Program Load Phase 1 Begins Found message file card 61 at bank slot 0 2 Found system file card 41 at bank slot 0 6 Scrubbing all known DRAM memory 00000000 01000000 Call IPL2 bootloader SYNCing IPL2 ROOT VERSION 324500 0 System Type XC1000 PRIMARY FILE CARD ST...

Page 210: ...rd 43 standby redundant file card 08 If offset 07 43 offset 08 indicates which side is active 05 side B is active 07 side A is active 09 Always contains 01 The ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt is then displayed When the XC1000 is booted at this command IPL3 is loaded and displays the secondary file card status message file card and message drives Do not attempt to boot the XC1000 if the first 2 digits of...

Page 211: ...ne the number of system drives that should be running Offsets 03 and 04 report the number of system drives that are installed The file system finds the drives by reading the install table for the list of installed drives The status of the system and message file cards are displayed on the SMT in the following format PRIMARY FILE CARD STATUS ss rr rr dd dd 00 00 00 00 01 where ss file card status c...

Page 212: ...at not all of the installed system drives are running PRIMARY FILE CARD STATUS 03 01 00 03 00 00 00 00 00 01 Offsets 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 The drives running are shown in offsets 01 and 02 as 01 00 when transposed the value is 00 01 which can be converted to the binary value of 0000 0000 and 0000 0001 which indicates that one system drive is running The drives installed are shown in offset...

Page 213: ...wing offset 00 are not signifi cant An example of a status code 20 in the primary file card status line appears as follows PRIMARY FILE CARD STATUS 20 34 34 34 34 00 00 00 00 01 When there is a hardware or a software problem neither system drive zero nor system drive one is ready If status code 20 appears reseat the system file card If status code 20 reappears replace the card If card replacement ...

Page 214: ...wer and reboot the XC1000 8 If the message drive is still not running replace the drive controller board Refer to section 8 4 4 for procedures to replace the module 9 If the message drive is still not running replace the drive using the appropriate message drive replacement procedure in Chapter Eight 10 If the drive is a system drive and the system was booted with the drive not running the remaini...

Page 215: ...power g Allow the drives to stop spinning about 30 seconds then move system drive zero from drive slot two to drive slot zero h Turn on system power and boot the system using the A com mand to return the XC1000 to service 13 If XC1000 was booted with system drive zero removed and reinstalled then rebooted with system drive one removed perform the following steps a Shut down the system using menu 1...

Page 216: ...top the screen from scrolling Refer to Figure 6 9 for the location of the serial numbers The serial numbers are displayed in the offsets in the install table as shown in Figure 6 9 and listed in Table 6 4 Read the serial numbers in four bytes from right to left A 02 is located in the offset directly to the right of the serial number offsets which indicates the start of the serial number SELECT DIS...

Page 217: ...em in the correct slots 8 Return to the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt 9 Reboot the XC1000 with a B then an A Offset 00 of the file card status line should be 00 10 If XC1000 has processed calls run garbage collect The procedures for running garbage collect are found in Chapter Nine 6 2 5 DLC Tests After booting the XC1000 with an A the CPU tests the DLCs Make sure that all DLCs upload successfully as ...

Page 218: ...ollows TOTAL OF 72 LINES FOUND PRESS ANY KEY TO PAUSE LOAD APPLICATION OK APPLICATION SUCCESSFULLY LOADED Starting up System Services Partition Checking Data Directory Loading Address Management Table Figure 6 10 Example of the IPL3 Screen Showing Line Configurations for a Single Cabinet XC1000 6 2 6 1 SST Loading In the rare case where the SST does not load correctly immediately call the Octel Co...

Page 219: ... cards 5 Vdc supply voltages Correct any problems found 6 Shut the XC1000 doors turn on XC1000 power and reboot the XC1000 with an A 6 2 6 3 Data Bus DMA Test The CPU tests the direct memory access DMA data bus by sending messages to and receiving them from DLCs and file cards If DATA BUS DMA FAILED is displayed a DLC is probably the cause of the failure To determine which DLC caused the test fail...

Page 220: ...U The screen displays the following message Fatal Error Can t Load Application Error 12 If a TIC and DLC pair is not found during the line configuration test complete the following steps 1 Verify that the positions of the TICs in relation to the DLCs are correct 2 Reseat the cards and boot the XC1000 again 3 If the ports are still not displayed replace the DLC with a known good DLC and boot the XC...

Page 221: ...ons shown in Table 6 5 Table 6 5 Monitor Card LED Descriptions LED Description LED Description RT Red temperature DC Disk capacity YT Yellow temperature CWD CP watchdog timer 5 V 5 Vdc SA Service affecting 12 V 12 Vdc OOS Out of service 48 V 48 Vdc telecom NSA Non service affecting LF Logic bay fans RD Relay disable DF Disk bay fans REC RDAC incoming call HW Hardware XMT Off hook RDAC SW Software ...

Page 222: ...3 L2 PWR CAB1 CAB2 RT YT 5V 12V 48V LF DF HW SW DC CWD SA OOS NSA RD REC XMT RAD LED RESET DPF DWV TER A B ACT SBY Figure 6 11 Monitor Card Indicators System Manager Shutdown indicates that the system manager has shut down XC1000 using menu 13 1 or 13 1 2 Power Supply Failure is activated when there is a total loss of 5 Vdc or 12 Vdc power An SA alarm is also activated shown in menu 13 8 when XC10...

Page 223: ...itions is discussed in sections 6 3 1 1 through 6 3 1 5 6 3 1 1 System Software Failure An OOS alarm caused by a software failure results in XC1000 being out of service A system software failure requires that the XC1000 be rebooted The alarm appears in menu 13 8 after the XC1000 is rebooted The alarm is not cleared until the system manager types C to clear the alarm If the alarm appears again afte...

Page 224: ...h the red temperature level even if two of the three fans in either bay fails Partial fan failure is indicated by an NSA alarm so the problem can be corrected before it reaches the red temperature stage If the red temperature lasts longer than 30 seconds the monitor card automatically trips the main circuit breaker 6 3 1 3 CPU Watchdog Timeout The monitor card maintains a watchdog timer to detect ...

Page 225: ...s occur under the following conditions Disk Space Critical is activated when 10 of the message space remains RS 232 C Link Failure is activated when the RS 232 C link fails CDR Space Critical is activated when 10 of the Call Detail Record CDR buffer space remains Status Log Space Critical is activated when 10 of the status log buffer space remains Critical Entry in Status Log is activated when an ...

Page 226: ...nk fails An RS 232 C link failure is reported in menu 6 5 Integration Link Management For additional information check the status log for an F9 error then refer to section 7 3 22 for a description of an F9 error Perform the following steps to correct the link failure 1 Check that the RS 232 C cable is securely connected to the XC1000 If this does not solve the problem proceed with step 2 2 Check m...

Page 227: ...k fails the DF disk bay fans or LF logic bay fans LED lights on the monitor card The SA LED also lights If logic bay or disk bay temperatures reach the red temperature threshold of 70oC 158oF because of fan failure the monitor card will shut down the XC1000 as explained in section 6 3 1 2 Menu 13 8 might be updated depending on how quickly the XC1000 shuts down Because there are three fans each in...

Page 228: ...affecting alarms occur under the following conditions Disk Space Low is activated when 20 of the message space remains CDR Space Low is activated when 20 of the buffer space for Call Detail Records CDR remains Status Log Space Low is activated when 20 of the status log buffer space remains Entry in Status Log is activated when an NSA alarm is recorded in the status log Yellow Line Temperature indi...

Page 229: ...he status log and clear it 2 Return to menu 13 8 Review Current Alarm Status screen 3 Print out the current menu 13 8 and clear all alarms Refer to section 5 2 for information about printing menu 13 8 and the status log If any problems still exist contact the next level of mainte nance or call the Octel Communications Technical Assistance Center 6 3 3 3 CDR Space Low If CDR space is low download t...

Page 230: ...e or two fans but not all three fans have failed The alarm status can be viewed in menu 13 8 Inspect the fans and replace any faulty fans before all three in one bay fail The monitor card takes no further action unless the ambient logic bay or disk bay temperatures rise enough to generate a red temperature alarm 6 3 3 7 Partial Power Failure A partial 5 Vdc or 12 Vdc power loss is present when one...

Page 231: ...LED is off and the yellow SEL LED flashes on during read and write operations If the RUN LED is off or the INOP LED is on the drive is faulty Troubleshoot the drive as described in section 6 2 4 5 6 After replacing a suspected logic card or drive clear all alarms in menu 13 8 Review Current Alarm Status and verify that the monitor card SA and HW LEDs go off INOP SEL RUN Figure 6 12 Disk Drive LEDs...

Page 232: ...ormally closed NC and a common COM contact For each alarm category connect a remote audible or visual alarm to the NO contact for each alarm category The J25 pins used for each alarm category are listed in Table 6 9 J43 J44 J45 J46 J47 J48 J49 J50 J25 CONNECTOR TO RDAC PINS 1 26 TO REMOTE ALARM PINS 20 25 45 47 49 SCCS INTERFACE Figure 6 13 Main Distribution Board Showing J25 Connector and SCCS In...

Page 233: ...utes if no data is entered To force the SMT to log out press C at the system manager terminal The RDAC does not have an automatic logout press C to log out of the RDAC 6 4 2 1 Manual RDAC Dialup To access the RDAC terminal manually perform the following steps 1 Dial the XC1000 RDAC dedicated telephone number and wait for the RDAC carrier tone 2 When the RDAC carrier tone registers press the DATA b...

Page 234: ... pause 4 5 seconds pause To disconnect the RDAC from XC1000 return to the SMT Main Menu on the RDAC terminal Press C on the terminal keyboard or press the TELE button on the RDAC modem to disconnect the call Use the following steps to connect the RDAC automatic remote access 1 Push the PSTN button on the RDAC modem in Make sure that all other buttons are out 2 At the terminal keyboard enter CRN nn...

Page 235: ... SCCS data link to the XC1000 The SCCS is supplied by the customer and attached to the XC1000 through J49 on the distribution board Figure 6 13 A critical indicator CI channel also called a summary status channel allows one way communication to the Switching Control Center SCC where alarm conditions can be visually displayed The status messages are sent from XC1000 to the SCC every 2 minutes or wh...

Page 236: ...binet 2 NSA SA 17 Fan failure cabinet 2 NSA SA 6 5 HIGHLIGHTS Procedures for booting the XC1000 include the following Startup CPU self tests IPL tests to check the status of the file system and drives Line configuration tests XC1000 has three alarm conditions out of service OOS alarms service affecting SA alarms and non service affecting NSA alarms These alarms light LEDs on the front edge of the ...

Page 237: ...7 STATUS LOG ...

Page 238: ...4 7 11 7 3 4 Status Code 05 7 11 7 3 5 Status Code 08 7 11 7 3 6 Status Codes 50 Through 58 7 12 7 3 7 Status Code 60 7 13 7 3 8 Status Code 61 7 14 7 3 9 Status Code 64 7 15 7 3 10 Status Code 65 7 16 7 3 11 Status Codes 70 and 72 7 17 7 3 12 Status Code 75 7 20 7 3 13 Status Code 84 7 22 7 3 14 Status Code 86 7 23 7 3 15 Status Code 90 7 24 7 3 16 Status Codes 98 99 and 9A 7 24 7 3 17 Status Cod...

Page 239: ...F9 7 34 7 3 22 1 Subcode 00 65 at Offset 08 7 34 7 3 22 2 Subcode 01 08 at Offset 08 7 43 7 3 22 3 Subcode 01 69 at Offset 08 7 44 7 3 23 Status Code FA 7 45 7 3 24 Status Code FB 7 47 7 3 25 Current Status Log List 7 48 7 4 HIGHLIGHTS 7 52 Section Page ...

Page 240: ...s Codes 70 and 72 7 18 Table 7 10 Failed Record Locations in Offsets 07 Through 0C 7 19 Table 7 11 Validity Check Error Codes 7 26 Table 7 12 Status Code C7 Related Offsets 7 27 Table 7 13 Status Code C7 Subcodes 7 27 Table 7 14 Hexadecimal to Binary Conversions 7 31 Table 7 15 Offsets 08 and09 Subcode Values for Status Code CF 7 32 Table 7 16 Failed Record Locations in Offsets 07 Through 0C 7 33 ...

Page 241: ...6 7 39 Table 7 23 Status Code F9 Value 07 in Offset 46 7 39 Table 7 24 Status Code F9 Value 08 in Offset 46 7 41 Table 7 25 Status Code FA Subcodes at Offsets 08 and 09 7 46 Table 7 26 Status Code FA Values 7 46 Table 7 27 Status Code FB Subcodes in Offsets 08 and 09 7 47 Table 7 28 Status Code Entries in the Status Log 7 48 Page ...

Page 242: ...xample of Status Code 03 7 11 Figure 7 8 Example of Status Code 04 7 11 Figure 7 9 Example of Status Code 05 7 12 Figure 7 10 Example of Status Code 08 7 12 Figure 7 11 Example of Status Code 50 7 12 Figure 7 12 Example of Status Code 60 7 13 Figure 7 13 Example of Status Code 61 7 14 Figure 7 14 Example of Status Code 64 7 15 Figure 7 15 Example of Destination Card Address for Status Code 64 7 15...

Page 243: ...98 7 25 Figure 7 27 Example of Status Code C7 7 27 Figure 7 28 Example of Status Code CD 7 28 Figure 7 29 Example of Status Code CE 7 31 Figure 7 30 Example of Drive Test CB Messages 7 33 Figure 7 31 Example of Status Code F9 7 35 Figure 7 32 Example of a Status Code F9 Entry With Subcode 00 08 at Offsets 08 and 09 7 43 Figure 7 33 Destination Card Address 7 43 Figure 7 34 Example of a Status Code...

Page 244: ... for information only and do not indicate a malfunction Select 2 Review Status Log from menu 13 to display the status log which includes a variety of status entries in chronological order starting with the oldest entry Use the following steps for tracing a problem reported in the status log 1 Review and print the status log from menu 13 option 2 2 Review the English status code descriptions and if...

Page 245: ...at unless otherwise noted for example mailbox or telephone numbers A byte contains two hexadecimal digits or eight bits An offset refers to the position of a byte based on a zero reference point A digit followed by an h in text indicates hexadecimal Each entry in the status log contains two parts a header and a body These parts are described in sections 7 2 1 and 7 2 2 Figure 7 1 is an example of ...

Page 246: ...000 00000B16 0B360100 h k d 6 00010 9A810100 3E010000 01000001 3E010000 00020 00000040 000F0000 3400FFFF C0D40100 4 00030 00000000 6B012200 00000000 00000000 k 00040 0000773D 6B012301 FFFFFFFF 00000000 w k 00050 00000000 2201B001 7E00DF08 E10BE108 00060 34003400 69741700 4 4 it Figure 7 2 Example of a Status Log Entry Showing the Header and Body Elements The date and time shows when the entry was ...

Page 247: ...k source codes and their descriptions Table 7 1 Task Source Codes 00 8F Line task number 90 Root task 91 Scanner task 0 92 Scanner task 1 93 Scanner task 2 94 File task 0 95 System manager task 0 96 System manager task 1 97 System manager task 2 98 System manager task 3 99 System manager task 4 9A System manager task 5 9B System manager task 6 9C System manager task 7 9D Purge task 9E Minute task ...

Page 248: ...d Address in the IORB Not all status log entries contain an IORB peripheral address When status log entries contain an IORB peripheral address it can occur at different locations in the body of the status log entry depending on the status code However the IORB peripheral address commonly occurs in line 00010 To assist in interpreting a status code entry the location of the IORB peripheral address ...

Page 249: ...d Unused Unused LOGICAL a Nonredundant XC1000 LINE CARD LINE CARD LINE CARD CABINET 1 CABINET 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 System File Card A System File Card B Message File Card A Message FIle Card B Monitor ACP Optioal TIC DLC TIC or unused DLC TIC DLC TIC or unused DLC TIC DLC DLC TIC DLC DLC TIC DLC DLC TIC DLC DLC 0 6 0 1...

Page 250: ... log entry the response from the destination CB IN begins at the 16th hexa decimal byte following or directly underneath the beginning of the CB OUT message For example if a CB OUT message starts at offset 34 the CB IN message begins at offset 44 The value at offsets 34 and 44 is the task source the value at offsets 35 and 45 is the destination the value at offsets 36 and 46 is the message type Fi...

Page 251: ...tus entry was logged The message type determines the remainder of the 16 byte CB message Table 7 5 provides a list of the most common CB message types Table 7 5 is located at the end of the chapter on a foldout page following Table 7 4 The table is required throughout the chapter when interpreting the status codes in section 7 3 Leave Table 7 5 folded out for easy reference when using section 7 3 ...

Page 252: ...status code 00 Offset 10 The value displayed in offset 10 indicates how the system was booted using a boot command A or 0 If the value in offset 10 is 30 the system was booted with a 0 zero If the value is 41 as shown in Figure 7 6 the system was booted with an A Offset 11 The value displayed in offset 11 indicates why the system restarted The example shown in Figure 7 6 indicates that the system ...

Page 253: ...26 Watchdog timer NMI 27 SST problem 40 Unable to preserve value for first boot 41 Power failure 42 INT3 43 Memory parity error NMI 44 System manager shutdown 45 Undetermined NMI 46 Watchdog timer NMI 47 SST problem Value Second System Restart First System Restart 7 3 2 Status Code 03 Status code 03 is the code for the remote access port for the RDAC no carrier after ring Figure 7 7 is an example ...

Page 254: ...ot being set correctly or calls being answered with a generic system greeting Figure 7 8 is an example of a status code 04 30 MAY 92 09 39 54AM RS232 Link Reset By System Manager INFORMATION ONLY 00000 6CC09502 04000000 000036E3 2B360100 00010 THRU 00050 CONTAIN 00 00050 00000000 00000000 00000000 14000506 00060 2CB30000 44004400 E69D1F00 Figure 7 8 Example of Status Code 04 7 3 4 Status Code 05 S...

Page 255: ...us codes are also logged if the CB message sent from a logic card contains errors Figure 7 11 shows an example of a status code 50 with the pertinent offsets and details highlighted SLOT BANK 21 JUL 92 12 14 38PM Possible Bad Hardware NOTIFY SUPPORT REPRESENTATIVE 00000 24009000 5000FF01 FFFF265E A7440100 00010 THRU 00020 CONTAIN 00 00020 4D0E6000 Figure 7 11 Example of Status Code 50 In status co...

Page 256: ... as listed in Table 7 7 Table 7 7 Subcode Values in Offsets 08 09 for Status Code 60 Description 00 Inactive logic card was detected 01 Logic card uploaded and running 03 Logic card diagnostic test failed 04 Logic card failed to upload 05 No DLC was found in system Subcode Value 2 Depending on the value found in offsets 08 and 09 also check offset 07 to determine additional information about the l...

Page 257: ...f the subcodes located in offsets 08 and 09 Table 7 8 Subcode Values at Offsets 08 and 09 for Status Code 61 Description 00 Incomplete standby redundant card set was found 01 No standby redundant cards were found 02 Standby redundant card failed or was removed 04 Logic card failed to upload 05 No DLC was found in system Subcode Value 2 Depending on the value found in offsets 08 and 09 check offset...

Page 258: ...5400FFFF C0D40100 00030 00000000 1D012200 00000000 00000000 00040 0000373E 1D012301 FFFFFFFF 00000000 00050 00000000 2200B001 0000E10C E30CD014 00060 54005400 CD791F00 Figure 7 14 Example of Status Code 64 Use the following additional offsets to analyze status code 64 Offsets 18 and 19 To determine the IORB peripheral address or destination card address with which the CPU was communicating at the ...

Page 259: ...000 00006315 0000E10C 72157402 00060 44004400 95711F00 Figure 7 16 Example of Status Code 65 A001 01A0 BANK SLOT CHANNEL OFFSETS 18 AND 19 Figure 7 17 Example of Destination Card Address for Status Code 65 Because identifying the port or trunk in question is pertinent to interpreting a status code 65 Table 7 3 provides the correlation between the channel Figure 7 17 and the physical port Using the...

Page 260: ...5 entries appear or if multiple status code 65 entries continue to appear after these actions are taken ports on various TICs are affected Verify that the lines connected to the indicated ports are not busied out in the switch 7 3 11 Status Codes 70 and 72 Status codes 70 and 72 are related to I O errors Status code 70 appears during a disk write operation and indicates a file system drive I O err...

Page 261: ...ndicated card is the message file In a redundant system the indicated card is the system file side B Offset 36 The CB message type Table 7 5 is reported in offset 36 The message type value shown in Figure 7 18 is 1A decrement use count which means to reduce by one the number of messages contained in a mailbox In other words the subscriber or XC1000 has deleted a message Offset 37 The drive number ...

Page 262: ... on the drive Skip to step 12 to correct the problem otherwise proceed to step 6 6 Shut down the system menu 13 1 7 At the boot command press DT to access the drive test utility menu and run a long test on the affected drive refer to section 9 6 1 for procedures 8 If the drive test fails CB messages are displayed on the system man ager terminal If the test has failed because of a hard error the CB...

Page 263: ...rect drive slot and is seated properly 14 Turn on the system power and check whether the RUN LED on the drive module is lit If the RUN LED is not lit turn off the system power and remove the affected drive module 15 Replace the I O adapter board in the drive module Refer to section 8 4 3 for the procedure to replace a disk I O adapter board 16 Return the drive module to the XC1000 turn on the syst...

Page 264: ... message type Offset 46 The response message from the affected card returning to the CPU is contained in offset 46 For example Figure 7 20 shows 05 in offset 36 of the CB OUT message as the message type and 45 in offset 46 of the CB IN message Refer to Table 7 5 where the message type 05 in offset 36 shows that the CPU has commanded the DLC to seize a line The message type 45 in offset 46 shows th...

Page 265: ...o become accustomed to their new mailboxes and passwords turn it back on Figure 7 22 is an example of status code 84 29 SEP 91 10 48 19PM Illegal Number of Bad Password Attempts Accessing Mailbox INVESTIGATE SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT 00000 24C08500 84000000 000013B8 23360100 00010 810D0000 5A010100 02000794 56221000 00020 462A2700 Figure 7 22 Example of Status Code 84 Offsets pertinent to status code 84 ...

Page 266: ...6 Offsets pertinent to the CB messages in status code 86 are as follows Offsets 18 and 19 The IORB peripheral address identifying with which card the CPU was communicating at the time of the error is located in these offsets Check offsets 18 and 19 transpose the bytes and refer to Figure 7 24 and Table 7 2 2001 0120 BANK SLOT CHANNEL OFFSETS 18 AND 19 Figure 7 24 Example of IORB Peripheral Address...

Page 267: ... 2700 Figure 7 25 Example of Status Code 90 To correct this problem either instruct the subscriber to disable outcalling in the mailbox or enter an outcalling number in menu 9 1 for that sub scriber s mailbox Offsets pertinent to status code 90 and correction of the problem are as follows Offset 14 Offset 14 shows the number of digits in the mailbox number In the example shown in Figure 7 25 there...

Page 268: ...en the use count reaches zero the purge task changes the free space table and notifies the message file card that the previously occupied area is now available for storing new messages The purge task also performs validity checks on subscriber mailboxes Each mailbox also called a user record contains checkpoints Each checkpoint has a defined range of values The purge task verifies that each of the...

Page 269: ...box number in AMT 00B7 Duplicate mailbox name in name table 00B8 Full AMT 00B9 Full NMT 00BE Damaged user record 0001 Bad community record length 0002 Bad community record level 0003 Bad internal community number ICN 0004 Bad community number length 0005 Bad community name length 0006 Bad contact number length 0007 Bad telephone number length 0008 Bad bulletin IUN 0009 Bad after hours IUN 000A Bad...

Page 270: ...00 3400FFFF C0D40100 00030 00000000 3B012410 80885EA1 01000000 00040 00000000 3B012410 80885EA1 01000000 00050 00000000 3B012410 80885EA1 01000000 00060 00000000 00000000 Figure 7 27 Example of Status Code C7 Table 7 12 lists the related offsets for status code C7 and their descriptions Table 7 12 Status Code C7 Related Offsets Offsets Description 08 09 Subcodes refer to subcode descriptions in Ta...

Page 271: ...ld using the information provided in this section E001 E009 E012 E028 E002 E00A E013 E080 E003 E00B E014 E103 E004 E00C E015 E107 E005 E00D E016 E108 E006 E00E E017 E110 E007 E00F E020 E27E E008 E011 E021 Immediately report a status code CD showing a transposed value not listed above to the Octel Communications Technical Assistance Center Appendix D provides a complete list of reason codes that ca...

Page 272: ...of bad sectors is 10 To correct the cause of a status code CD perform the following steps 1 Call the Octel Communications Technical Assistance Center and have the service option enabled 2 If multiple CD entries in the status log indicate different drives replace the file card indicated in the IORB peripheral address offsets 14 and 15 Use section 8 3 1 to replace the file card If a single drive is ...

Page 273: ... not running turn off the system power verify that the drive module is in the correct drive slot and is seated correctly 12 Turn on the system power and check whether the RUN LED on the drive module is lit If the RUN LED is not lit turn off the system power and remove the affected drive module 13 Replace the I O adapter card in the drive module section 8 4 3 14 Return the drive module to the XC100...

Page 274: ...physical card indicated Offset 43 The value in offset 43 indicates which drives are installed in hexadecimal form Use Table 7 14 a binary to hexadecimal conversion chart to determine which drives are installed Offset 44 The value in offset 44 indicates which drives are running in hexadecimal form Use Table 7 14 to determine which drives are running Menu 12 also indicates which drive is not running...

Page 275: ...orting line card group 0 5 Table 7 15 Offsets 08 and 09 Subcode Values for Status Code CF Subcode Description 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 Description Received yellow alarm Received red alarm Received OOF alarm Received blue alarm Received AIS alarm Received EBPV alarm Received EES alarm Yellow alarm cleared Red alarm cleared OOF alarm cleared Blue alarm cleared AIS alarm cleared EBPV...

Page 276: ...ars indicating a hard disk error the drive must be replaced Offsets 07 through 0C report the location of the bad record as shown in Table 7 16 Table 7 16 Failed Record Locations in Offsets 07 Through 0C Offset Entry Description 07 Drive number 08 09 Cylinder number 0A Head number 0B Sector number 0C Number of bad sectors Status codes F0 and F1 do not report a defective record number These status l...

Page 277: ...3 22 Status Code F9 The F9 status code entries are logged for general integration errors by the line task system manager task or integration task The asynchronous communications processor ACP applications code translates various integration related messages into CB messages to and from the CPU Regardless of whether an ACP card is installed the ACP applications code converts integration related mes...

Page 278: ... 07 Bad return from ACIO 08a No dial tone detected for PID R 09 Integration timeout 0A Continuous incoming message 0B Incoming queue overflow 0C Too many digits in dial request 0D Nonzero return code in CIP message 0E Incoming integration message on port marked no for incoming calls in menu 4 0F Incoming integration message on nonintegrated port nonintegrated line type 10 Bad return from line card...

Page 279: ...ort ID received from PID R The value of 0065 in offsets 08 09 in Figure 7 31 indicates an integration status message Other important offsets as shown in Figure 7 31 are as follows Offset 32 The value in offset 32 indicates information about integra tion message types The message type 05 shown in offset 32 indicates that an invalid message waiting request occurred A command was sent by the CPU to h...

Page 280: ... APID PID R DMID alerting message 88 Seize line response 89 Dial digits response 8A Reconnect response 8B Transfer response 8C Set message waiting response 8D Clear message waiting response 8E On hook response 8F Off hook response 90 Reset response 91 Asyncronous port configuration response 92 Set LTN response 93 Polling response 94 Disconnect detected 96 Set message waiting extension response 97 ...

Page 281: ... 7 21 Offset 46 Values for Status Code F9 01 ACP internal 02 ACP message waiting 03 Message waiting illegal extension 04 AT T System 75 PBX integration device APID 75 05 APID 85 06 PBX integration device ROLM PID R 07 Analog Meridian SL 1 integration device AMID 08 Digital Meridian SL 1 integration device DMID Description Offset 46 Value When a value of 06 is found at offset 46 it shows a PID R er...

Page 282: ...cted checksum error while communicating with 652 processor 2 751 channel no 652 state Data Data 06 751 processor detected error on IIC bus 2 751 channel no 652 state Data Data 07 751 processor detected a line input overrun 1 751 channel no 652 state Data Data 08 751 processor detected an unrecognized command 1 751 channel no 652 state Data Data 30 652 processor detected an incorrect message from 7...

Page 283: ...ng clear DN found 1 751 channel nos 1 12 Ext no Ext no Ext no 58 No digit echo during message waiting indication 1 751 channel nos 1 12 Ext no Ext no Ext no 59 No digit echo during message waiting clear 1 751 channel nos 1 12 Ext no Ext no Ext no 5A Bad or blocked extension for message waiting indication 1 751 channel nos 1 12 Ext no Ext no Ext no 5B Bad or blocked extension for message waiting cl...

Page 284: ... B C state A B C timer Data 17 MPDA A B C power up warning 4 A B C Data Data Data 20 DMID received LED wink message and does not know how to process it 5 22 DMID received LED Flash message when channel state was not in this state PBX can send multiple lamp flash message 6 27 DMID received a digit but the channel state is not in this state 6 29 DMID received an ASCII message but the channel state i...

Page 285: ...in this state 6 Received message Received message Received message Received message 3C MIK MCK release expired Transparency mode will be reestablished Message waiting will not work until transparency mode is reestablished 7 C C state C timer C counter 3D 3F Received type 1 2 3 off hook message from PBX Logs this if the phone is being programmed in overlay 11 or if hook switch is toggled 4 40 41 Re...

Page 286: ...000000 0000FFFF 30750000 00000000 00030 15151030 15000000 00000000 00000000 00040 A6008700 15000450 31FFFFFF 0F000000 00050 A8770000 AA170000 00000000 58460000 00060 E4FFFFFF 10000000 B20B0000 5C005C00 00070 5C000000 95058046 EC030000 934B0000 00080 1700 Figure 7 32 Example of a Status Code F9 Entry With Subcode 0008 at Offsets 08 and 09 Offsets 14 and 15 For subcode 0008 at offsets 08 and 09 the ...

Page 287: ...RONMENT 00000 82C09102 F9000000 69002719 AA470100 00010 2D010000 15000000 2D010000 00000000 00020 00000000 0000FFFF B80B0000 00000000 00030 91151200 91000000 00000000 00000000 00040 90158610 91008600 18000400 00000000 00050 A8770000 05000000 88020000 00000000 00060 E4FFFFFF 10000000 8C010000 3400D801 00070 00000000 55008002 EC040000 CF080000 00080 0F00 Figure 7 34 Example of a Status Code F9 Entry...

Page 288: ...rovides information specific to the integration device installed refer to Table 7 21 Refer to Tables 7 22 7 23 and 7 24 for additional pertinent information about the specific integration device 7 3 23 Status Code FA Status code FA logged by the InterMail task occurs when the X 25 port is polled at reboot for functionality and no connection is found or because communication initiated from the XC10...

Page 289: ... 22 Failure on UR write 23 Problem with message waiting evaluation Offsets 16 and 17 The value located in offsets 16 and 17 is usually an Octel command language OCL library value Table 7 26 lists the values that can occur in these offsets Table 7 26 Status Code FA Values Value Description C2FF Operation failed C3FF Application number does not exist C4FF OCL is not up C5FF OCL interface routine int...

Page 290: ...ovide additional information about the task occurring between the host and XC1000 Table 7 27 lists these subcodes Offsets 16 and 17 The values for status code FB that can occur in offsets 16 and 17 are the same as for status code FA Refer to Table 7 26 Table 7 27 Status Code FB Subcodes in Offsets 08 and 09 Subcode Description 11 Failure on OCL_INIT call 12 Virtual circuit already open on OCL_OPEN...

Page 291: ... is disabled integrated voice message service IVMS and integration devices for Meridian SL 1 and M1 PBXs MID 1B Switch busy during message waiting operation 1Fb RS 232 link is down 22 Internal error in the X interface code 23 Internal error in the OCL interface code 24 EAP related error 25 Error in the OCL system utility routine 26 Internal error occurred during IVR application 27 Internal error o...

Page 292: ...write 5D Soft reset of CB peripheral 5E SBI DMA CRC error 5F X 25 task crashed 60a Logic card status 61a Standby redundant card status 63 Channel reset was successful 64a File system central processor software error restart system or session task 65a Line card protocol error restart system or session task 66 Line task internal error restart system or session task 67 Tree invalid parameter to actio...

Page 293: ...r digital MID DMID class of service does not allow message waiting 96 File system central processor software error 97 Purge task internal error 98a Bad user record at read 99a Bad user record during processing 9Aa Bad user record at write 9B File system drive I O error 9C File system DMA timeout 9D Data checksum mismatch 9E Data bus error return code 9F Scramble code error or I O error during mess...

Page 294: ...y D0 CPU file system protocol out of sequence D1 Operating system reported failed data bus operation with file system D2 Data bus checksum error between central processor and file system D3 Control bus operation failed while preparing or checking data bus operation with file system D4 Inconsistent or no status from operating system on control bus data bus operation D5 Operating system reported con...

Page 295: ...rflow event task FD File access error a Explained further in this chapter 7 4 HIGHLIGHTS The XC1000 reports system status in the status log Entries in the status log are used to monitor and troubleshoot the system The information in this chapter can be used to interpret the structure and meaning of the most common status code entries The status log can be viewed and printed by entering menu 13 opt...

Page 296: ...0 4 Slot 23 4 4 Slot 6 0 5 Slot 24 4 5 Slot 7 1 6 Slot 25 2 6 Slot 8 1 0 Slot 26 2 3 Slot 9 1 1 Slot 27 2 4 Slot 10 1 2 Slot 28 2 5 Slot 11 1 7 Slot 29 2 7 Slot 12 1 3 Slot 30 3 0 Slot 13 1 4 Slot 31 3 1 Slot 14 1 5 Slot 32 3 2 Slot 15 3 7 Slot 33 4 7 Slot 16 2 0 Slot 34 3 3 Slot 17 2 1 Slot 35 3 4 Slot 18 2 2 Slot 36 3 5 Table 7 3 Port Identification Channel Port 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B A B C D E...

Page 297: ...STATUS LOG 7 54 Edition One XC1000 Service ...

Page 298: ...3K 1 3 A 12 23 3L 1 3 B 12 24 4A 1 5 0 14 25 4B 1 5 1 14 26 4C 1 5 2 14 27 4D 1 5 3 14 28 4E 1 5 4 14 29 4F 1 5 5 14 2A 4G 1 5 6 14 Task Source Port Destination DLC Sl t Task Source Port Bank Slot Address Line TIC Channel Slot Decimal Nonredundant Continued 2B 4H 1 5 7 14 2C 4I 1 5 8 14 2D 4J 1 5 9 14 2E 4K 1 5 A 14 2F 4L 1 5 B 14 30 5A 2 0 0 16 31 5B 2 0 1 16 32 5C 2 0 2 16 33 5D 2 0 3 16 34 5E 2...

Page 299: ...10G 3 2 6 32 73 10H 3 2 7 32 74 10I 3 2 8 32 75 10J 3 2 9 32 76 10K 3 2 A 32 77 10L 3 2 B 32 78 11A 3 3 0 34 79 11B 3 3 1 34 Task Source Port Destination DLC Sl t Task Source Port Bank Slot Address Line TIC Channel Slot Decimal Nonredundant Concluded 7A 11C 3 3 2 34 7B 11D 3 3 3 34 7C 11E 3 3 4 34 7D 11F 3 3 5 34 7E 11G 3 3 6 34 7F 11H 3 3 7 34 80 11I 3 3 8 34 81 11J 3 3 9 34 82 11K 3 2 A 34 83 11...

Page 300: ...phrase buffer 3B Write phrase buffer complete 3C Write phrase buffer response 3D Reset 3E Reset response 3F Install drive Code Description File Card Message Type Concluded 40 Install drive response 41 General configuration response for file card 42 Checkpoint 43 Checkpoint response 44 Space available request 45 Space available request response 46 Garbage collect begin 47 Garbage collect begin resp...

Page 301: ...e 87 DLC write speech buffer done 88 DLC reset channel 89 DLC dial DTMF digit 8A DLC get signal transition 8B DLC signal detect begin Code Description DLC and TIC Message Types Concluded 8C DLC signal detect end 8D DLC set dial tone 8E DLC enable Autovon keys 8F DLC stop special phrase 90 DLC purge event queue response 91 DLC return input event 92 DLC read speech buffer 93 DLC read speech buffer s...

Page 302: ...8 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT ...

Page 303: ... 8 4 4 1 Verifying Part Numbers 8 16 8 4 4 2 Replacing the Board 8 18 8 4 4 3 Addressing and Terminating a Drive 8 23 8 4 5 Reassembling a Drive Module 8 23 8 4 6 Running Validity Checks 8 24 8 4 7 Running Garbage Collect 8 26 8 4 8 Testing the Drive 8 28 8 4 9 Replacing System Drive Zero 8 29 8 4 9 1 Taking the XC1000 Out of Service 8 30 8 4 9 2 Copying System Data to the Replacement Drive 8 31 8...

Page 304: ...t Plug Power Supplies 8 48 8 5 4 Replacing the 48 Vdc Power Control Assembly 8 48 8 6 FAN REPLACEMENT 8 51 8 6 1 Removing the Fan Grill and Fan Assembly 8 51 8 6 2 Installing the New Fan Assembly 8 53 8 6 3 Reinstalling the Fan Grill 8 53 8 6 3 1 Replacing Fan Grill on Rear Fan 8 53 8 6 3 2 Replacing Fan Grill on Front Fan 8 54 8 7 BACKPLANE REPLACEMENT 8 55 8 7 1 Replacing the Cabinet 1 Distribut...

Page 305: ... 8 6 Figure 8 4 Proper EPROM Alignment 8 10 Figure 8 5 Removing a Disk Drive Module 8 13 Figure 8 6 Disk Drive Module Assembly 8 14 Figure 8 7 Disk Drive Showing HDA and Maxtor Part Number Locations 8 16 Figure 8 8 Labels on 760 MB Disk Drive Assembly Part Number 012 1022 001 8 18 Figure 8 9 Disk Drive Assembly and Cover Removed From Bottom Module Cover 8 19 Figure 8 10 Disk Drive Assembly With Fr...

Page 306: ...ocations a 5 Vdc power supply 8 45 b 12 Vdc power supply 8 45 c Location of 5 Vdc and 12Vdc power supplies shown from the cabinet rear 8 46 Figure 8 24 Location of Spring Screws on Power Supplies With and Without Hot Plug Capability 8 47 Figure 8 25 48 Vdc Power Control Assembly From Cabinet Rear 8 49 Figure 8 26 48 Vdc Power Control Assembly 8 50 Figure 8 27 Fan Assembly Replacement Shown From Ca...

Page 307: ...ns 8 62 Figure 8 36 Temperature Sensor Mounting on Top of the Card Cage 8 63 Figure 8 37 Drive Fan Panel and Distribution Board 8 64 Figure 8 38 Disk Drive Backplane Rear View 8 64 Figure 8 39 Disk Drive Backplane Front View 8 66 Figure 8 40 Dual Cabinet XC1000 Showing Tie Plate Rear View 8 68 Figure 8 41 Cable Clamps on Main Backplane 8 69 Figure 8 42 Replacing the Main Backplane Cover 8 70 Page ...

Page 308: ...ing procedures DO NOT require the XC1000 to be taken out of service Replacing or adding hot pluggable line and telephone interface cards Replacing hot plug power supplies Replacing fans 8 2 XC1000 SHUTDOWN Perform the following steps to shut down the XC1000 1 Call the Octel Communications Technical Assistance Center and have the service option enabled 2 Coordinate with the system manager to take t...

Page 309: ...ithout shutting down the XC1000 Refer to section 8 3 2 for procedures for replacing hot plug DLCs and TICs Before replacing any logic cards review Appendix B for the Return Material Authorization RMA procedures Complete the following steps when replacing a logic card 1 Follow the procedure in section 8 2 to take the XC1000 out of service 2 Turn the XC1000 power off by switching the main power circ...

Page 310: ...ke sure it is tight If the guide pin turns when twisted clockwise between the fingers it must be tightened Tightening the guide pins requires removing the backplane Before tightening the guide pins call the National Technical Assistance Center When interchanging swapping cards to isolate a problem always check for damaged connectors on each card A damaged connector can cause damage to the correspo...

Page 311: ... card into its slot with the extractors fully open Use the card extractors to apply pressure on the outer edges of the board to make sure that the card is properly seated in the backplane as shown in Figure 8 2 HOLD UPPER EXTRACTOR LEVER UP WHEN INSERTING CARD THEN PUSH IT DOWN TO ENGAGE CARD CAGE FRAME Figure 8 2 Engaging Card Extractors 9 Remove the antistatic wrist strap and store it in the 48 ...

Page 312: ...rts while the XC1000 is off line The process for replacing cards in a digital line card group differs slightly from the process for replacing cards in an analog line card group A digital line card group consists of two DLCs and one T1 TIC or three DLCs and one E1 TIC or PTIC An analog line card group has two DLCs and two ATICs E M TICS or DID TICS Differences in processes are as follows If a T1 TI...

Page 313: ...enance Review Card Management List of Active DLC s Card Slot 10 DLC TIC 9 12 ATIC lines Card Slot 12 DLC TIC 11 12 T1 lines Card Slot 14 DLC TIC 11 12 T1 lines Card Slot 16 DLC TIC 15 12 ATIC lines Card Slot 18 DLC TIC 17 12 ATIC lines List of Inactive DLC s Card Slot 8 DLC DEAD Enter Card Slot Figure 8 3 Example of Menu 13 11 Review Card Management 3 At the Enter Card Slot prompt enter the slot n...

Page 314: ...ds to be reinserted must be pulled out from the backplane for at least 30 seconds If these cards are not out for 30 seconds the XC1000 might not recognize that the cards have been removed Take care not to cause card ejector or backplane pin damage and insert the ATIC quickly when replacing it If an ATIC is inserted too slowly calls could be dropped by the other ATIC in the line card group Caution ...

Page 315: ...o upload Check the card configuration in menu 13 11 and make sure that all disabled cards are removed from the backplane for at least 30 seconds If a line card group encounters a diagnostic failure when uploading a warning message appears indicating which diagnostic test failed 15 The following message appears on the screen if cards in an analog card group are being replaced Undo the BUSY OUT of t...

Page 316: ...automatically 4 Remove the antistatic wrist strap and store it in the 48 Vdc power control slot 5 Close the doors on the front of the cabinet 6 Access Menu 4 Port Assignments from the Main Menu Configure the ports for the new cards Refer to the XC1000 System Manager Manual for more information about menu 4 and configuring port assignments 8 3 3 Replacing EPROMs When upgrading to a new software rel...

Page 317: ...the board with an EPROM puller It might be necessary to rock the EPROM from side to side to release it Take care not to twist the EPROM while removing it The socket could be damaged 5 Remove the new EPROM from its protective packaging and place it on a grounded static dissipative mat Make sure to place the notched end of the EPROM over the notched end of the EPROM socket on the card If the EPROM i...

Page 318: ...es Replacing disk I O adapter boards Replacing disk controller boards Replacing system drive zero Replacing system drive one Replacing the message drives Installing additional message drives When replacing or installing drive modules inspect all connectors for damage When inserting a drive module into the system use gentle even pressure to slide it into the drive slot Do not force the drive into t...

Page 319: ...semble a drive module Save all hardware that is removed during this procedure 1 Follow the steps provided in section 8 2 to take the XC1000 out of service 2 Switch the main power circuit breaker to the OFF position 0 Wait 2 minutes to allow the drives to spin down 3 Loosen the holding screw at the front of the affected drive module 4 Press the module extractor lever down and slide the module out o...

Page 320: ...REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT 8 13 Edition One XC1000 Service CABINET FRONT VIEW DISK DRIVE MODULE EXTRACTOR LEVER Figure 8 5 Removing a Disk Drive Module SECTION 8 4 ...

Page 321: ...S DATA BUS CONNECTOR CONTROL BUS CONNECTOR 6 PLACES REAR MODULE COVER POWER CABLE SCREWS I O ADAPTER BOARD BOTTOM MODULE COVER Figure 8 6 Disk Drive Module Assembly 8 Loosen the module extractor lever release screw Figure 8 5 and the screws that hold the top and bottom module covers together Figure 8 6 SECTION 8 4 ...

Page 322: ...CE are logged on the same drive The file card status displays a code 03 The XC1000 cannot read any records using disk utilities The I O adapter board can be replaced in about 1 2 hour Perform the following steps to replace the I O adapter board 1 Before replacing the I O adapter board verify that the drive module is inoperative by running validity checks and garbage collect sections 8 4 6 and 8 4 ...

Page 323: ...n 8 4 4 1 Verifying Part Numbers The disk controller board is one of two different disk controller boards that can be used Make sure that the replacement board has the same part number as the one removed or the drive will not function and messages will be lost Perform the following steps to ensure that the correct disk controller board is used 1 To determine the type of disk controller board to us...

Page 324: ...k Controller Board Part Number 078 1068 000 003 1052 000 1018383 078 1069 000 003 1095 000 1018362 078 1072 000 003 1052 000 003 1095 000 1018383 1018362 Use the Maxtor part number to identify the disk controller board The Maxtor part number not the Octel part number is shown on the disk controller board 4 Make sure that the drive repair kits are complete Previously shipped kits contained only dis...

Page 325: ...e the faulty drive module 4 Disassemble the drive module using the procedure in section 8 4 2 5 Remove the disk drive cover as shown in Figure 8 9 6 Remove the 4 screws from the drive frame as shown in Figure 8 10 a A pair of screws is located on each side of the drive 7 Remove the bracket from the back of the drive Figure 8 10 a 8 Disconnect the power data bus and control bus cables from the driv...

Page 326: ...K DRIVE COVER DISK CONTROLLER BOARD SHOCK MOUNTS 4 PLACES DISK DRIVE ASSEMBLY MODULE EXTRACTOR 8 PLACES I O ADAPTER BOARD EXTRACTOR RELEASE SCREW BOTTOM MODULE COVER 4 PLACES SCREWS Figure 8 9 Disk Drive Assembly and Cover Removed From Bottom Module Cover SECTION 8 4 ...

Page 327: ...D LUG SCREWS LUG NUT SCREWS TWO CABLES BOARD FRONT DISK CONTROLLER BOARD DRIVE FRAME ROTATED AWAY FROM HDA MOUNTING POST WITH GROUND LUG CABLE MOUNTING POST CONNECTOR BACK OF DRIVE BACK OF DRIVE b With drive frame rotated away from head disk assembly HEAD DISK ASSEMBLY HDA Figure 8 10 Disk Drive Assembly With Frame SECTION 8 4 ...

Page 328: ... JP45 RN14 RN13 JP14 CABLE CONNECTOR ADDRESS JUMPER JP16 24 JP32 39 THREE CABLES SIP SOCKETS WITH TERMINATORS Figure 8 11 Disk Controller Board Layout Table 8 3 Jumper Positions for the Disk Controller Board Jumper Location Position JP1 In JP6 Out DS1 DS7 Position 6 DS6 JP14 Out JP16 JP29 Not applicable Do not move installed jumpers JP30 In JP31 Out JP32 JP39 Not applicable Do not move installed j...

Page 329: ...d from the HDA Make sure that the insulator sheet remains Set the disk controller board aside 19 Place the new disk controller board on the drive and reconnect all cables except the LED wires to the controller board Insert and tighten the screws to secure the controller board and the insulator sheet on the HDA 20 Begin rotating the frame and faceplate assembly back to its original position 21 Befo...

Page 330: ...terminators Ensure that the terminators are configured to match the standard settings as shown in Figure 8 11 8 4 5 Reassembling a Drive Module To reassemble a drive module perform the following steps 1 Replace the disk drive cover Figure 8 9 on the disk drive removed in step 5 of section 8 4 4 2 2 Place the drive in the top module cover Figure 8 6 Align the shock mounts on the sides of the drive ...

Page 331: ...nty of paper and then turn on continuous printing at the printer by pressing the Copy Pr key on HP terminals or the Ctrl Shift Print keys on Wyse 50 terminals then return to the Main Menu The printer will provide a printout of the results of all the steps performed through the SMT during the replace ment procedure 4 Enter the current date at the Enter Menu Selection Number prompt in the format mmd...

Page 332: ...Select 10 for the Check user records vs AMT option The AMT is the address mapping table Type Y to confirm the selection The SMT displays all user record numbers If any user records are not listed in the AMT a status code appears next to the user record number When the XC1000 completes the user record vs AMT check a total of all user records assigned and the number of all user records not listed in...

Page 333: ...ddress length 00B6 Duplicate mailbox number in AMT 00B7 Duplicate mailbox name in name table 00B8 Full AMT 00B9 Full NMT 00BE Damaged user record 0001 Bad company record length 0002 Bad company record level 0003 Bad internal company number ICN 0004 Bad company number length 0005 Bad company name length 0006 Bad contact number length 0007 Bad telephone number length 0008 Bad bulletin IUN 0009 Bad a...

Page 334: ...ble code SC errors and the I O errors equals the total number of messages names or greetings lost during the first pass The number of messages destinations repre sents the total number of messages still remaining in the XC1000 The number of mailboxes with errors represents the number of mailboxes that will lose messages names or greetings when garbage collect is completed If this number is not zer...

Page 335: ...s 03 the drive is not functioning properly Replace the I O adapter board in the defective drive module If the first byte of the file card status is still 03 replace the disk controller board using the procedure in section 8 4 4 Reinstall the original I O adapter board and return the replacement I O adapter board to stock For system drives the updated software must be copied to the replacement Unti...

Page 336: ...n 8 4 9 If the drive module is system drive one use the procedure in section 8 4 10 If the drive module is a message drive use the procedure in section 8 4 11 For system drives enter the copy option utility by typing DC at the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt Select copy option V Verify Drive for Integrity to perform integrity checks The verification operation checks data records on a drive before a copy...

Page 337: ...1 Call the Octel Communications Technical Assistance Center and have the service option enabled 2 Shut down the system using menu 13 1 3 When the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt appears turn off power to the XC1000 4 Insert the backup drive in system drive slot two Label the drive as the backup drive Do not mark the sheet metal of the drive module 5 Turn on power to the XC1000 When the ENTER BOOT COMMAN...

Page 338: ...ng the drive serial numbers xxxxxx and yyyyyy in the example below verify that the serial numbers are correct before proceeding Answer the prompts as shown below SOURCE DRIVE LOCATION RETURN ENTER ALTERNATE SOURCE DRIVE LOCATION 1 ENTER DESTINATION DRIVE NUMBER 0 3 2 COPY ENTIRE SYSTEM FROM DRIVE 1 SN xxxxxx TO DRIVE 2 SN yyyyyy CONTINUE Y N Y WILL DESTINATION DRIVE BE A REPLACEMENT Y N Y VERIFY S...

Page 339: ...pass the test For details about drive test inconsistencies and procedures for what to do if an inconsistency occurs refer to section 9 6 1 7 When the drive test is completed successfully the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt appears Type B to reboot the XC1000 and refresh the CPU RAM When the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt reappears type A to return the system to normal operation 8 Log into the Main Menu and c...

Page 340: ...COMMAND prompt appears turn off power to the XC1000 3 Insert the backup drive in system drive slot 2 and label it as the backup Do not mark the sheet metal of the drive module 4 Turn on power to the XC1000 When the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt appears type DC to enter the COPY OPTIONS menu 5 Select option D SYSTEM ALL OF THE ABOVE to copy software phrases and database tables to the backup drive Answe...

Page 341: ...pt 5 Turn off power to the XC1000 6 Remove the defective drive from system drive slot one Label it and set it aside Do not use a permanent marker of any kind to label a drive 8 4 10 3 Installing the Replacement Drive Complete the following steps to install the replacement drive as system drive one 1 Place the new drive in system drive slot one 2 Turn on power to the XC1000 When the ENTER BOOT COMM...

Page 342: ...bout what to do if an inconsistency occurs refer to section 9 6 1 6 When the drive test is completed successfully the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt appears Enter the copy option utility by typing DC Select copy option V Verify Drive for Integrity to perform integrity checks The verification operation checks data records on a drive before a copy is performed or after an unsuccessful copy 7 Type B to re...

Page 343: ...ing the procedures in section 8 4 6 3 Run garbage collect on the drive to be replaced using the procedures in section 8 4 7 4 Shut down the system using menu 13 1 8 4 11 1 Copying to the Replacement Drive Perform the following steps to move the message drive to the system drive shelf initialize the replacement drive and copy messages to the replacement drive 1 When the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt ap...

Page 344: ...0 3 2 ENTER DESTINATION DRIVE NUMBER 0 3 3 COPY MESSAGES FROM DRIVE 2 SN Mxxxxxx TO DRIVE 3 SN Myyyyyy DRIVE NUMBER WHERE DESTINATION DRIVE WILL BE USED M0 M7 Mx CONTINUE Y OR N Y VERIFY SOURCE COPYING VERIFY DESTINATION COPY COMPLETE PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE When the message copy is complete errors are displayed in fields labeled DISK READ ERRORS and DISK WRITE ERRORS If a value other than zero ...

Page 345: ...E option 6 At the SELECT DRIVE TO REPLACE 1 M0 M7 prompt enter the number of the drive slot where the replacement drive is installed The SMT displays the drive selected and requests confirmation Enter Y if the selected drive is correct If the displayed drive is not correct press C to return to the COPY OPTIONS menu and repeat steps 4 through 6 7 When the installation is complete press any key to r...

Page 346: ...00 using menu 13 1 3 When the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt appears turn off power to the XC1000 4 Insert the new message drive module in the appropriate message drive slot 5 Turn on power to the XC1000 6 Type DI at the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt to enter the INSTALL OPTIONS menu 7 Select D for the initialize drive option Initialize the new drive as a message drive by answering the prompts as shown bel...

Page 347: ...the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt appears Type B to reboot the XC1000 and refresh the CPU RAM then A to return it to normal operation 3 Check menu 12 to verify that the drive is running 8 5 POWER SUPPLY AND POWER DISTRIBUTION REPLACEMENTS Power supplies cannot be adjusted and are replaced as units The 5 Vdc power supplies are located at the front of the XC1000 cabinet to the left of the logic bay The ...

Page 348: ...g steps to replace the power distribution assembly 1 Use the procedure in section 8 2 to take the XC1000 out of service 2 Turn off power to the XC1000 by switching the main power circuit breaker to the OFF position 0 The capacitor located on the power distribution shelf stores a hazardous charge Wait 5 minutes for the capaci tor to discharge before touching it Danger 3 Wait 5 minutes before procee...

Page 349: ...assembly The power shutdown cable near the bottom of the shelf 7 From the front of the cabinet remove the two mounting screws on the assembly front as shown in Figure 8 21 Set the screws aside in a safe place 8 Refer to Figure 8 21 and slide the assembly out the back of the cabinet Performing this step requires two people because of the weight of the power distribution assembly Make sure that all ...

Page 350: ...ected Voltage test points are located at the lower right corner of the distribution board on cabinet 1 TP1 is provided for the 12 Vdc TP2 for the 5 Vdc and TP3 for the reference ground return as shown in Figure 8 22 14 Turn on power to the XC1000 and return it to normal operation 15 Return the original power distribution assembly to Octel Communica tions Refer to Appendix B for appropriate procedu...

Page 351: ...t socket driver and a flexible socket extension Note the polarity identifiers and position of the wires to ensure that they can be properly reconnected to the replacement power supply Figure 8 23 a and b 6 Open the front doors of the cabinet Use a flat head screwdriver to loosen the captive spring screw that secures the power supply to the frame Figure 8 24 shows the location of the power supplies...

Page 352: ...LUE TO INPUT POWER WIRING HARNESS POWER CONTROL CABLE CONNECTORS OUTPUT POWER CABLE CONNECTORS POSITIVE NEGATIVE GRN BLK BLUE TO INPUT POWER WIRING HARNESS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT BREAKER b 12 Vdc power supply INPUT POWER CABLE INPUT POWER CABLE a 5 Vdc power supply Figure 8 23 Non Hot Pluggable Power Supply Connections and Locations SECTION 8 5 ...

Page 353: ... cables to the replacement power supply by bolting the wire ring lugs to the proper terminal stud using a 9 16 inch deep well socket socket driver and flexible socket extension Make sure that the polarity of the wires is correct for the connection Figure 8 23 11 Reconnect the power control and input power cables to the power supply If the power supply being replaced is a 12 Vdc supply make sure th...

Page 354: ...UN LEDs on the drive modules will light Check the monitor card LEDs to ensure that all PSU alarms are off 14 Using a dc voltmeter check the voltages on the distribution board Both the 5 Vdc and 12 Vdc must measure within 5 of nominal at the distributor board test points Figure 8 22 Voltage test points are located at the lower right corner of the distribution board TP1 is provided for the 12 Vdc TP...

Page 355: ...t 2 Use a flat head screwdriver to loosen the captive spring screw that secures the hot plug power supply to the front of the frame Figure 8 24 After removing the power supply from the slot there is hazardous energy inside the space from which the power supply was removed Do not set any tools inside this space or reach into this area Warning 3 Slide the hot plug power supply out of the slot 4 Inse...

Page 356: ...control assembly 1 Use the procedure in section 8 2 to take the XC1000 out of service 2 Turn off power to the XC1000 by setting the main power circuit breaker to the OFF position 0 3 Open the rear doors of the cabinet 4 Disconnect the three cables from the connectors on the rear of the power control assembly Refer to Figure 8 25 and Figure 8 26 for the location of the cable connectors SECTION 8 5 ...

Page 357: ...power control assembly into the empty slot 8 Use a flat head screwdriver to tighten the captive spring screw to secure the power control assembly to the frame 9 Close the front doors of the cabinet 10 At the rear of the cabinet reconnect the three cables to the power control assembly The connectors are keyed so they cannot be attached incorrectly Refer to Figure 8 25 and Figure 8 26 11 Turn on pow...

Page 358: ...replacement kits The XC1000 does not need to be shut down to install new fans Refer to Figure 8 27 and Figure 8 28 and use the procedures in sections 8 6 1 through 8 6 3 to remove and replace a malfunctioning fan assembly 8 6 1 Removing the Fan Grill and Fan Assembly Perform the following steps to remove the fan grill and fan assembly 1 Open the cabinet doors If replacing one of the intake front f...

Page 359: ...THE XC1000 Figure 8 27 Fan Assembly Replacement Shown From Cabinet Front INNER FLANGE OUTER FLANGE EXTERNAL TOOTH LOCKWASHER 4 PLACES ALLEN SCREWS 4 PLACES FLAT WASHER 4 PLACES 3 4 IN PHILLIPS HEAD SCREWS 4 PLACES NUT RETAINER BRACKET 2 PLACES GRILL FRONT FANS ONLY Figure 8 28 Fan Assembly and Grill SECTION 8 6 ...

Page 360: ...t 3 Place a lockwasher underneath the head of each of the four Allen screws 4 Insert the four Allen screws with external tooth lockwashers into the four mounting holes in the inner flange of the fan assembly Figure 8 28 5 Carefully position the fan assembly against the XC1000 chassis so that the screws are aligned with the press nuts in the chassis Figure 8 27 Be careful not to drop the screws and...

Page 361: ...ll and that it still can reach the power connector on the XC1000 chassis 6 Tighten the screws completely 7 Connect the fan wire connector to the power connector on the XC1000 chassis The connectors are keyed to fit properly do not force the connection 8 Make sure that the fan begins to spin and that the air flow is directed outward at the rear of the XC1000 9 Make sure that the XC1000 alarms turn ...

Page 362: ...connection 8 Make sure that the fan begins to spin and that the air flow is directed inward at the front of the XC1000 9 Make sure that the XC1000 alarms turn off If alarm LEDs are still lit contact the Octel Communications Technical Assistance Center 10 Close the cabinet doors 8 7 BACKPLANE REPLACEMENT Replacement procedures for the following backplane components are detailed in sections 8 7 1 th...

Page 363: ...osen the clamp securing screw then remove the four cable clamps located above the distribution board as shown in Figure 8 31 7 Remove the 17 Phillips screws and washers that secure the distribu tion board its mounting standoffs on the cabinet Figure 8 31 Retain the screws and washers for later use 8 Remove the distribution board 9 Place the replacement distribution board in its correct position wi...

Page 364: ...onnect all cables by jack or pin number as appropriate 15 Restore the XC1000 to service 16 Return the original board to Octel Communications Refer to Appendix B for the correct procedure for returning parts to Octel 8 7 2 Replacing the Cabinet 2 Distribution Board Cabinet 2 of a dual cabinet XC1000 contains a distribution board that is smaller than the board in cabinet 1 To replace the cabinet 2 d...

Page 365: ...ge of the board 7 Remove the six Phillips screws and washers that secure the board to the frame Remove the board as shown in Figure 8 32 Figure 8 32 Distribution Board Replacement Cabinet 2 8 Place the new distribution board in its correct position with the screw holes in the board aligned with the holes in the standoffs 9 Replace the six Phillips screws and washers to secure the board to the moun...

Page 366: ... XC1000 out of service 2 Turn off power to the XC1000 by switching the main power circuit breaker to the OFF position 0 3 Open the cabinet 1 rear doors Figure 8 33 shows the location of the two ACP I O distribution boards ACP I O ACP I O DISTRIBUTION BOARD 1 DISTRIBUTION BOARD 2 Figure 8 33 Location of ACP I O Distribution Boards 4 If replacing ACP board 1 disconnect the P101 cable connector from ...

Page 367: ...INTERFACE CONNECTORS J103 J118 NOT USED NOT USED Figure 8 34 Connectors on the ACP I O Distribution Boards 5 Label the DB25 interface cable connectors then disconnect them from the appropriate connectors J103 through J118 6 Remove the 20 Phillips screws and washers that secure the board to the disk backplane Retain the screws for securing the new board 7 Place the new board in the correct location...

Page 368: ... board located on the top of the card cage Warning 1 Use the procedure in section 8 2 to take the XC1000 out of service 2 Turn off power to the XC1000 by switching the main power circuit breaker to the OFF position 0 3 Open the rear cabinet doors 4 Locate the temperature sensor board that must be replaced One board is at the top of the card cage and the other is attached to the back of the drive f...

Page 369: ...gure 8 35 Temperature Sensor Board Locations 8 7 5 Replacing Disk Drive Bus Terminator Boards To replace a malfunctioning bus terminator board on the disk drive backplane perform the following steps 1 Use the procedure in section 8 2 to take the XC1000 out of service 2 Turn off power to the XC1000 by switching the main power circuit breaker to the OFF position 0 SECTION 8 7 ...

Page 370: ...e single slotted captive screw that secures the drive bus terminator board to the backplane When facing the cabinet rear the drive bus terminator board for the upper drive shelf is located on the upper left side of the backplane The drive bus terminator board for the lower drive shelf is located on the lower right side of the back plane also from the cabinet rear These locations are shown in Figur...

Page 371: ...E PANEL PHILLIPS SCREWS 18 PLACES J54 Figure 8 37 Drive Fan Panel and Distribution Board DISK DRIVE BACKPLANE DRIVE BUS TERMINATOR BOARDS CAPTIVE SCREW CAPTIVE SCREW ORANGE POSITIVE 12 VDC POWER SUPPLY CONNECTIONS BLACK NEGATIVE Figure 8 38 Disk Drive Backplane Rear View SECTION 8 7 ...

Page 372: ...e become damaged from disk drives being installed with excessive force a disk drive shelf backplane does not need to be replaced Disk drive backplanes are replaced from the front of the XC1000 Figure 8 39 shows the upper shelf of the disk drive backplane with the drive modules removed Perform the following steps to replace a damaged disk drive shelf back plane 1 Use the procedure in section 8 2 to...

Page 373: ...emove the appropriate board for the shelf being removed Loosen the captive slotted screw that secures the drive bus terminator board to the backplane Figure 8 38 12 Carefully remove the drive bus terminator board from the backplane Use a voltmeter to ensure that no voltage is present on the 12 Vdc bus bars before proceeding with the next steps Injury could occur Caution 13 Use a voltmeter to check...

Page 374: ...oard on the backplane Tighten the captive screw to secure the drive bus terminator board to the backplane Figure 8 38 20 Reattach the data cables to the rear of the backplane 21 Reinstall the drive fan panel assembly and replace the 18 Phillips screws and washers to secure the assembly to the frame 22 Connect fan power connector P54 to J54 on the distribution board Figure 8 37 23 Connect all cable...

Page 375: ...abinet as shown in Figure 8 41 Observe that the red tracer stripe on the ribbon cable is down 4 Tag all cables by jack or pin number as appropriate then disconnect them Figure 8 42 shows the cables disconnected 5 Remove the cable ties on right side of the backplane cover three places that secure the wiring 6 Remove the 14 Phillips screws and washers four down each side and three across the top and...

Page 376: ...each side and three across the top and bottom that secure the main backplane cover to the backplane 10 Replace the cable ties on the right side of the backplane cover three places that secure the wiring 11 Connect all cables as appropriate Figure 8 42 12 Fasten the 3 16 inch hex head screws to the five cable clamps that secure cables to the cabinet Figure 8 41 Make sure that the red tracer stripe ...

Page 377: ...ure and tighten the cable clamps around the cable shields can result in unacceptable radiated emissions causing noncompliance with FCC Part 15 rules Caution 13 For a dual cabinet XC1000 replace the eight Phillips screws and washers that secure the cabinet main backplane extender tie plate to cabinets 1 and 2 Figure 8 40 14 Close the doors on the rear of the cabinet SECTION 8 7 ...

Page 378: ...g steps 1 Turn off power to the SMT 2 Disconnect the power cord 3 Disconnect the printer and communications cables 4 Remove the terminal 5 Position the replacement SMT where the original SMT was located 6 Connect the printer and communications cables to the SMT 7 Connect the power cord 8 Turn on power to the SMT 9 Press the power button to turn the SMT on Listen for an immediate beep which indicat...

Page 379: ...by using the procedures in this chapter These procedures include information about the following components Drive module subassemblies Disk I O adapter boards Disk controller boards System drives zero and one Message drives Replacement procedures provide assistance to the service engineer when power supplies fans backplanes and circuit boards need to be replaced These procedures include informatio...

Page 380: ...9 SYSTEM UTILITIES ...

Page 381: ...tion E WRITE DISK RECORD 9 11 9 4 5 6 Utility Option F WRITE DISK TABLE 9 12 9 4 5 7 Utility Option G CLEAR USER RECORD BUFFER 9 12 9 4 5 8 Utility Option P DISPLAY CB PACKET TRACE TABLE 9 13 9 4 5 9 Utility Option S COMPUTE CHECK SUM 9 13 9 4 6 Install Option J ADD SECTOR TO BAD SECTOR TABLE 9 13 9 4 7 Install Option K RECOVER DISK RECORD 9 14 9 4 8 Install Option L RECOVER INSTALL TABLE 9 15 9 4...

Page 382: ... 3 Terminal Type Selection 9 30 9 7 REFORMAT OPTIONS 9 30 9 7 1 Reformat Option 0 Validity check user records 9 31 9 7 2 Reformat Option 3 Convert Mailboxes to ACP Integration 9 31 9 7 3 Reformat Option 4 Garbage collect 9 32 9 7 4 Reformat Option 6 Convert Mailbox Length 9 35 9 7 5 Reformat Option 7 Convert Type 52 Mailbox to Type 0 9 37 9 7 6 Reformat Option 8 Turn off message waiting indicator ...

Page 383: ...ONS Menu 9 17 Figure 9 6 COPY OPTIONS Menu 9 19 Figure 9 7 Copying New Software to System Drive 0 9 27 Figure 9 8 VERIFY OPTIONS Menu 9 27 Figure 9 9 Reformat Menu 9 31 Figure 9 10 First Page of the CENTREX LINK DEFINITION MENU Screen 9 32 Figure 9 11 Menu 18 3 Interface Operation 9 33 Figure 9 12 Garbage Collect First Pass 9 34 Figure 9 13 Garbage Collect Second Pass 9 35 Figure 9 14 MAILBOX LENG...

Page 384: ...ilities incorrectly can cause serious damage to data Caution The utilities described in this chapter could differ depending on the software release that the XC1000 is using This version of system utilities reflects software Release 1 5 9 2 UTILITY MENU ACCESS The utilities are accessed from and displayed on the SMT The utilities comprise five menus accessed from the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt Each ...

Page 385: ... Menu 13 on the SMT 4 When the EXECUTION TRACE message appears on the screen press C to stop the system from printing 5 When the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt appears type a command to enter the desired menu Table 9 1 lists the commands used to access the five utility menus 9 3 SPECIAL STATUS INDICATORS If a communication problem is detected while a utility is running the initial program load IPL usua...

Page 386: ...R In the rare event that the IPL receives an unrecognizable response this message is displayed CB IN and CB OUT messages are also displayed The IPL waits 10 minutes for the CB IN message before it times out If the IPL was instructed to execute an operation and the SMT does not display any activity within 10 minutes the operation has failed If the operation failed turn off the XC1000 turn it on aga...

Page 387: ...ing prompt appears INSTALL DRIVE xx SELECTED CONTINUE Y OR N 4 Enter Y to execute the operation The CPU issues a command to the appropriate file card system or message to install the selected drive The following prompt appears INSTALLING INSTALL COMPLETE SELECT DRIVE TO INSTALL 1 3 M0 M7 The file card performs the following tasks to install a drive Reads the boot table of the drive being installed...

Page 388: ...CLEAR DRIVE x SELECTED CONTINUE Y OR N 4 Enter Y to execute the operation The CPU issues a command to the appropriate file card system or message to remove the selected drive from the system software The following prompt appears DRIVE CLEARED SELECT DRIVE TO CLEAR 1 3 OR M0 M7 The file card performs the following Removes the serial number of the selected drive from the install table on system driv...

Page 389: ...wing prompts appear INITIALIZING DRIVE 0 RE INSTALLED INSTALL COMPLETE MESSAGE DRIVE 0 RE INSTALLED As drive 0 is installed the message DRIVE 0 RE INSTALLED appears As message drive 0 is installed the message MESSAGE DRIVE 0 RE INSTALLED appears If any segment of the operation fails a control bus message is displayed on the screen 9 4 4 Install Option D INITIALIZE DRIVE New system or message drive...

Page 390: ...ce documentation or service engineers Using these utility options incorrectly can cause serious damage to data Caution The DISK UTILITY OPTIONS menu appears when option I is selected from the INSTALL OPTIONS menu The DISK UTILITY OPTIONS menu is used primarily for reading and repairing data records Figure 9 3 shows the DISK UTILITY OPTIONS menu DISK UTILITY OPTIONS A READ DISK RECORD B READ DISK T...

Page 391: ...1 SST system status table 04 Sys0 Sys1 COS class of service table 05 Sys0 Sys1 Statistics 06 Sys0 Sys1 CDR 07 Sys0 Sys1 System groups 08 Sys0 Sys1 Name table 09 Sys0 Sys1 System dump 2D Sys0 Sys1 File system status log 2F Msg0 Msg1 RAT record allocation table 31 All message drives Messages 32 All message drives Sections 9 4 5 1 through 9 4 5 9 describe the options provided in the DISK UTILITY OPTI...

Page 392: ... option more than one record can be displayed in the buffer 9 4 5 2 Utility Option B READ DISK TABLE Use utility option B to read a disk table If a disk table is corrupted the service engineer can read the table correct it using option C and write the change to the table using option F The following database tables can be read and changed using these utilities Directory File allocation table Boot ...

Page 393: ...ging a record buffer read the record or table using option A or B in the DISK UTILITY OPTIONS menu Use utility option D to view the record buffer information 2 Select utility option C to change any byte value in a record or table Enter C at any time to cancel the operation The following prompts appear CHANGE RECORD FUNCTION TYPE CTRL C TO ABORT OR OPTIONAL HEX VALUE FOLLOWED BY CR OR TO OPTIONALLY...

Page 394: ...to the end of the buffer Stop the scrolling at any time by pressing the space bar Cancel the operation by pressing C twice 9 4 5 5 Utility Option E WRITE DISK RECORD Utility option E writes the contents of the record buffer to the designated drive Perform the following steps to write the record buffer last read to the desired drive Use the write to disk operation carefully Inappropriate entries ca...

Page 395: ...ty option B and changing the table utility option E select utility option F to write the change to both copies of the table The ENTER DRIVE NUMBER 0 3 OR M0 M7 prompt appears 2 Enter the drive to which the change is to be written to both copies of the table 3 Press the Enter key to write the change to the disk tables 4 When the operation is completed the system returns to the DISK UTILITY OPTIONS ...

Page 396: ... 94 53 80 CARD 0 I 00 00 29 00 00 28 14 E0 D0 FD 00 00 00 A6 28 00 CARD 0 O 00 00 5A 02 01 00 00 00 28 00 00 00 00 96 48 80 CARD 0 I 00 00 5B 00 00 28 49 99 F5 6A FF FF 00 49 47 00 END OF BUFFER PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE If no messages are in the buffer the message TRACE BUFFER EMPTY is displayed This utility is the same as the install option P section 9 4 10 The function can be performed by selec...

Page 397: ...any key to return to the INSTALL OPTIONS menu If a sector is added to the bad sector table on a system drive system data could be lost Copy the software from the other installed drive to the affected drive by using option D SYSTEM ALL OF THE ABOVE from the COPY OPTIONS menu refer to section 9 5 This procedure allows any data lost on the affected drive to be recovered 9 4 7 Install Option K RECOVER...

Page 398: ...ates system tables to include all currently running drives as installed drives Caution The file card SRAM contains a copy of the XC1000 s latest operations If the XC1000 goes out of service it attempts to reboot using the last information contained in the file card SRAM If the SRAM is reinitialized and the XC1000 goes out of service messages can be lost Perform the following steps to deinstall all...

Page 399: ...CREASE TO 12500 USERS 4 INCREASE TO 15000 USERS 5 INCREASE TO 30000 USERS SELECT OPTION 2 Specify the total number of users to be configured by selecting an option from the list in the prompt and entering it in the SELECT OPTION field 3 The IPL verifies that the entered value is greater than the current user record count If the entered value is less than the current user record count an error mess...

Page 400: ... 4 11 Install Option S SYSTEM EXPANSION UTILITY Use the system expansion utility to increase the number of languages supported Although shown on the screen options A B and C CDR group list and name storage expansion respectively are set at maximum capacity at the factory and cannot be changed 1 Select option S from the INSTALL OPTIONS menu The SYSTEM EXPANSION OPTIONS menu appears as shown in Figu...

Page 401: ...ture allows up to six administrator terminals to access certain maintenance and administration menus simultaneously from a single XC1000 MTA comprises the MTA personal computer the MTA port box through which the administrator terminals and the XC1000 are connected and the software in XC1000 that supports the MTA feature When the MTA feature is purchased from Octel Installation Instructions P N 181...

Page 402: ...le and record numbers reported in the CB IN messages The file number is reported in offset 06 the record number is reported in offsets 07 and 08 transposed 3 When the copy or verify operation is completed enter the INSTALL OPTIONS menu and select option K RECOVER DISK RECORD refer to section 9 4 7 Respond to the prompts appropriately entering the file and record number reported in each CB IN messa...

Page 403: ...s case do not enter a number at the ENTER SOURCE DRIVE LOCATION prompt just press the Enter key Enter 1 at the ENTER ALTERNATE SOURCE DRIVE LOCATION prompt The following prompt appears ENTER DESTINATION DRIVE NUMBER 0 3 4 After the source or alternate source drives are entered the IPL prompts for the destination drive displays all entered information and requests confirmation Enter the number of t...

Page 404: ...e Phrases The procedure for copying phrases is identical to that for option A SOFTWARE refer to section 9 5 1 The following prompts appear on the screen sequentially as they are answered SELECT COPY OPTION ENTER SOURCE DRIVE LOCATION ENTER ALTERNATE SOURCE DRIVE LOCATION ENTER DESTINATION DRIVE NUMBER 0 3 COPY PHRASES FROM DRIVE x SN xxxxx TO DRIVE y SN yyyyy CONTINUE Y OR NO Y LANGUAGE DATA FOR D...

Page 405: ...om an upgrade drive If the system data tables are copied from a master drive to the existing system drives the existing system database will be destroyed and all messages will be lost Caution Option C allows system data tables to be copied from a source drive to a destination drive The following data areas are copied System manager menus System group lists System status table SST Address managemen...

Page 406: ...ystem drive When performing a software upgrade use copy option D only to make a backup copy of the existing system drive If system data is copied from a master drive to the existing system drives the system database will be destroyed and messages lost Caution Prompts allow the source and destination drives to be specified and whether the destination drive will replace a drive Perform the following...

Page 407: ...xxxxx TO DRIVE 3 SN Myyyyyy DRIVE NUMBER WHERE DESTINATION DRIVE WILL BE USED M0 M7 CONTINUE Y OR N 2 Enter Y for XC1000 to perform the copying The following messages appear on the screen COPYING BAD TRACKS READ DEC 0 BAD TRACKS WRITTEN DEC 0 DISK READ ERRORS DEC 0 DISK WRITE ERRORS DEC 0 MSG ID S SUBSTITUTED DEC 0 COPY COMPLETE PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE 3 Press any key to return to the COPY OPTIO...

Page 408: ...e COPY OPTIONS menu The following prompt appears CLEAR BAD WRITE TABLE 1 SYSTEM FILE CARD 2 MESSAGE FILE CARD SELECT OPTION 2 Enter a 1 or 2 Select 1 to clear the bad write table on a system drive Select 2 to clear the bad write table on a message drive The following prompt appears on the screen CLEAR BAD WRITE TABLE MESSAGE OR SYSTEM DRIVES CONTINUE Y OR N 3 Enter a Y to clear the bad write table...

Page 409: ...ording The phrases are loaded into the drives before shipment 9 5 11 Copy Option K REPLACE DRIVE Use option K to replace a system or message drive after copying data to the replacement drive This function substitutes the replacement drive s serial number and bad sector table for the existing drive s serial number and bad sector table Perform the following steps 1 Before running this utility use co...

Page 410: ...E ORIGINAL SYSTEM DRIVE 0 1 SHOULD BE IN SYSTEM SLOT 1 CONTINUE Y OR N Y UPGRADE DRIVE FROM DRIVE 0 SN MXXXXXXX TO DRIVE 1 SN MYYYYYYY CONTINUE Y OR N Y CONFIGURE DRIVE COPY SOFTWARE READ CHECK SOURCE COPYING RECHECK DESTINATION COPY PHRASES READ CHECK SOURCE COPYING READ CHECK DESTINATION UPGRADE COMPLETE Figure 9 7 Copying New Software to System Drive 0 3 Verify that the serial numbers displayed...

Page 411: ...n a drive that contains data or messages could cause data or messages to be overwritten Before performing a drive test run garbage collect on the drive to be tested The second pass of garbage collect updates the free space table Caution Perform the following steps to run a drive test 1 Enter the drive test utility by typing DT at the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt The following prompt is displayed DRIV...

Page 412: ... option F section 9 5 6 5 Always refresh RAM by booting the system with a B after running the drive test and before booting with an A 9 6 2 Read Only Operation If a message drive is malfunctioning use the read only operation until the drive can be replaced Messages can still be retrieved from the drive but new messages cannot be written to it Message space will become available as subscribers dele...

Page 413: ... selecting option L 9 7 REFORMAT OPTIONS Use the reformat options to perform various utilities and conversions Running a reformat option at an inappropriate time can cause loss of data or damage to the database Use the reformat options only when directed to do so Caution Perform the following steps to access the reformat options menu 1 At the Main Menu type the current date as the menu selection i...

Page 414: ... CONFIRM USER RECORD VALIDITY CHECK appears type Y and press the Enter key 3 When the prompt CHECK DONE PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE appears press any key then verify that no errors were reported for any mailboxes from the printouts Correct any damaged user records that are found before continuing with the software upgrade 9 7 2 Reformat Option 3 Convert Mailboxes to ACP Integration Reformat option 3...

Page 415: ...r if the unique prefix assignment number contains fewer than four characters for example 942X If these fields are not properly configured message waiting will not function Each prefix can occur only once in the CENTREX LINK DEFINITION MENU 3 After all link IDs have been assigned or the Print Send key pressed the values entered must be verified Type R to review or modify the entries 4 Type Y to pro...

Page 416: ...C1000 the X 25 link must be stopped before running garbage collect From the Main Menu select option 18 for X 25 Interface Management 5 From menu 18 select option 3 for X 25 Interface Operation Menu 18 3 appears as shown in Figure 9 11 Menu 18 X 25 Interface Management Interface Operation Physical Interface Number 0 Enter 1 Start 2 Immediate Stop Enter the number of the operation you wish to perfor...

Page 417: ...he first pass is com plete scramble codes SC and I O errors are reported on a screen similar to Figure 9 12 If any errors are detected during the first pass contact the Octel Communications Technical Assistance Center If no errors are detected type Y at the ENTER Y TO CHANGE USER RECORDS AND UPDATE FREE SPACE TABLES prompt and press the Enter key to continue to the second pass ENTER DRIVE TO GARBA...

Page 418: ...ption 18 for X 25 Interface Management 3 From menu 18 select option 3 for X 25 Interface Operation 4 In the Physical Interface Number field enter the number of the XC1000 DB25 connector to which the X 25 link is connected and press the Enter key Valid interface numbers are 0 and 1 5 In response to the prompt at the bottom of the screen in menu 18 3 type 2 for Immediate Stop and press the Enter key...

Page 419: ... Length number of digits Figure 9 14 MAILBOX LENGTH CONVERSION UTILITY Screen 14 In the Current Mailbox Length number of digits field enter the number of digits that the mailboxes currently have 15 In the New Mailbox Length number of digits field enter the number of digits that the mailboxes will have The prefix matrix appears on the screen as shown in Figure 9 15 MAILBOX LENGTH CONVERSION UTILITY...

Page 420: ...Option 9 Download This option is not currently used 9 7 8 Reformat Option 10 Check user records vs AMT Reformat option 10 checks the user records against the address manage ment table AMT It is primarily used during upgrades and within the context of the upgrade procedures To check the user records against the AMT perform the following steps 1 At the prompt type REFORMAT and press the Enter key 2 ...

Page 421: ... 7 11 Reformat Option 13 Convert ICMB from COS to MB This option is not currently used 9 7 12 Reformat Option 14 Convert System Distribution Lists to Mailboxes This procedure is only required for XC1000s being upgraded from software levels below 1 5X Refer to section NO TAG for the procedure to convert system distribution lists to mailboxes Use this reformat option only in the context of the upgra...

Page 422: ... sector to the bad sector table Clear the bad write table Reset the CDR pointers Replace a drive Upgrade a system drive Verify a drive for integrity Drive tests can be short medium or long Drive tests are used to verify bad sectors Reformat options are reached by typing the current date at the Main Menu and at the prompt typing REFORMAT The reformat options are used to perform various utilities an...

Page 423: ...nd the line card groups that include TICs and DLCs the power supplies the main backplane and its elements the main distribution board the drives and the drive backplanes the auxiliary equipment shelf and the SMT Chapter Eleven provides descriptions of the optional features available for the XC1000 These optional features include the asynchronous communications processor ACP the multiple SMDI link ...

Page 424: ...10 COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS ...

Page 425: ... Card 10 9 10 2 2 2 V3 2 Monitor Card 10 11 10 2 2 3 UL Fuse Requirements 10 11 10 2 3 File Cards 10 11 10 2 3 1 F10 File Card 10 13 10 2 3 2 F20 File Card 10 13 10 3 LINE CARD GROUPS 10 14 10 3 1 Digital Line Cards DLCs 10 15 10 3 2 Telephone Interface Cards TICs 10 16 10 3 2 1 ATICs 10 17 10 3 2 2 DID TICs 10 19 10 3 2 3 E M TICs 10 19 10 3 2 4 T1 TICs 10 19 10 3 2 5 E1 TICs 10 20 10 3 2 6 Prima...

Page 426: ...One XC1000 Service 10 7 DRIVES AND DRIVE BACKPLANES 10 30 10 7 1 Drive Modules 10 30 10 7 2 Disk Drive Backplanes 10 31 10 8 SYSTEM MANAGER TERMINAL SMT 10 32 10 9 CALL FLOW 10 33 10 10 HIGHLIGHTS 10 35 Section Page ...

Page 427: ...larm Configuration Switch Settings at S2 on the Distribution Board 10 30 Table 10 10 RS 232 C Pins for the SMT 10 33 FIGURES Figure 10 1 Front View of Dual Cabinet XC1000 Showing Major Components 10 1 Figure 10 2 Rear View of a Dual Cabinet XC1000 10 2 Figure 10 3 Diagrams of Dual Cabinet XC1000 Logic Bay Configurations 10 3 Figure 10 4 Status LEDs on the Front Edges of the Common Control Cards in...

Page 428: ...of Line Card Groups 10 15 Figure 10 11 LEDs on an ATIC 10 18 Figure 10 12 LEDs on a T1 TIC 10 20 Figure 10 13 LEDs and Diagnostic Jacks on an E1 TIC 10 22 Figure 10 14 LEDs and Diagnostic Jacks on a PTIC 10 25 Figure 10 15 Main Backplane Configuration 10 27 Figure 10 16 Connections on the Main Distribution Board 10 29 Figure 10 17 Layout of Drive Modules 10 32 Figure 10 18 Switch XC1000 Call Flow ...

Page 429: ... of a dual cabinet XC1000 The major components of the XC1000 are the logic cards the disk drives the power system and the system interconnection hardware Optional features are described in Chapter Eleven 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 16 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 35 36 34 CABINET 1 CABINET 2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS 5 VDC POWER SUPPLY 5 VDC REDUNDANT POWER SUPPLY 48 VDC POWER...

Page 430: ...ds include the common control cards and the DLCs and TICs in line card groups The common control cards comprise the CPU monitor card and system and message file cards Optional equipment control cards are also located with the common control cards All logic cards are installed in the logic bay The logic bay in each cabinet is located in the upper section of the frame and is accessible from the fron...

Page 431: ...sed Unused LINE CARD LINE CARD LINE CARD CABINET 1 CABINET 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 System File Card A System File Card B Message File Card A Message FIle Card B Monitor ACP Optional TIC DLC TIC or unused DLC TIC DLC TIC or unused DLC TIC DLC DLC TIC DLC DLC TIC DLC DLC TIC DLC DLC 0 6 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 1 6 1 0 1 1 1 2 1...

Page 432: ... in stalled in proximity to the XC1000 The system manager terminal SMT is ancillary to the XC1000 cabinet and is used to configure the system 10 2 COMMON CONTROL CARDS The common control cards are used to control system operation The common control cards described in sections 10 2 1 through 10 2 3 are as follows Central processor unit CPU Monitor card System file card Message file card Asynchronou...

Page 433: ...ion of each LED During the system boot process LEDs L6 through L9 are used for internal diagnostic testing by the initial program load IPL If the CPU fails the diagnostic tests the LEDs indicate the reason Once the system boots L6 through L9 have no significant meaning Refer to section 6 3 4 for an explanation of the LEDs lit when the diagnostic tests fail Several types of CPUs are available for X...

Page 434: ...L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 PWR DDA SDA DDR SDR DAT DCC DSO DRY DPF DWV TER A B ACT SBY CP L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 PWR PFL TER A B ACT SBY C20 CPU CARD F20 FILE CARD Figure 10 4 Status LEDs on the Front Edges of Redundant Common Control Cards in a Redundant XC1000 SECTION 10 2 ...

Page 435: ...redundant card set A B Yellow CPU is part of redundant card set B ACT Green CPU active SBY Yellow CPU in standby mode S1 Figure 10 5 C10 CPU Memory Configuration Dip Switch Settings for 8 MB on S1 Caution If using a 16 MB C10 CPU card in a XC1000 that only requires 8 MB the S1 dip switches must still be set for 16 MB or the CPU will not function Before the C10 CPU can be used the S1 dip switches m...

Page 436: ... or standby redundant configura tions Selectable termination resistors that allow the CPU to operate in either a nonredundant or standby redundant configuration Improved serial bus interface SBI timing margins Several LEDs were added to the C20 CPU s front edge display for standby redundancy refer to section 11 6 3 1 and Table 10 1 The C20 CPU must have the S2 memory configuration switches located...

Page 437: ... type of alarm generated When the system is running the monitor card LEDs are visible when the front door of the XC1000 is open refer to Figure 10 4 Refer to section 6 3 for a detailed description of the alarms produced by the monitor card The moniter card includes four switches that enable audible NSA SA and OOS alarms The switch settings are described in Table 10 2 Table 10 2 Monitor Card Audibl...

Page 438: ...RDAC port status indicates incoming call to RDAC port XMT Green RDAC port status indicates call is connected off hook Single Column LEDs L9 L6 Green Internal diagnostics used only during boot process L5 Green CPU running L4 L3 Green Not currently used L2 Red Fault card out of service PWR Green Card receiving 5 Vdc The new or relocated LEDs on the front edge of the V3 monitor card include the follo...

Page 439: ...support systems configured for standby redundancy Boot diagnostic enhancements to allow testing of all the hardware controlled status registers and the system fan detection circuits The V3 2 monitor card uses the same audible alarm cadences as the V3 monitor card The LEDs on the front edge of the V3 2 card are the same as on the V3 card 10 2 2 3 UL Fuse Requirements Underwriters Laboratories UL re...

Page 440: ... the front edges of the file cards to indicate the status of the card Table 10 4 shows the LEDs and their functions Table 10 4 File Card LEDs LED Label LED Color Function All File Cards L9 L6 Green Internal diagnostics used only during boot process L5 Green card processor running L4 L3 Green Not currently used L2 Red Fault card out of service PWR Green Card receiving 5 Vdc F20 File Cards DDA Yello...

Page 441: ...t configuration The correct EPROMs must be present on the card for it to function correctly A low byte EPROM P N 039 1400 000 revision 9210 or higher must be at location U8V a high byte EPROM P N 039 1401 000 Rev 9210 or higher must be at location U10V The F20 contains LEDs to offer an increased level of card status information Figure 10 4 The following enhancements are present on the F20 file car...

Page 442: ... digital interface between two DLCs and the switch E1 TICs and PTICs provide a 30 channel interface so one TIC and three DLCs are used per line card group the last four channels on the third DLC are not used and two of the channels are used for signaling purposes ATIC DID TIC E M TIC and T1 TIC line card groups supply 24 voice channel connections to the switch The 24 ATIC DID TIC and E M TIC chann...

Page 443: ... a card configuration for all line card groups CPU FILE CARDS DLC FOR CHANNELS 1A 1L DLC FOR CHANNELS 2A 2L DLC FOR CHANNELS 3A 3L DLC FOR CHANNELS 4A 4L DLC FOR CHANNELS 5A 5L DLC FOR CHANNELS 6A 6L DLC FOR CHANNELS 7A 7H ATIC DID TIC OR E M TIC FOR CHANNELS 1A 1L ATIC DID TIC OR E M TIC FOR CHANNELS 2A 2L T1 TIC FOR CHANNELS 3A 4L E1 TIC OR CHANNELS 5A 7H PTIC FOR DATAAND CONTROL BUSES 12 PORTS ...

Page 444: ...switches located at S4 is provided on the DLC All the switches must be se to ON for the DLC to operate correctly A DLC uses the nine single LEDs located on the lower front of the card The functions of these LEDs are the same as those on the CPU and file cards Table 10 5 describes the LEDs on the front edge of a DLC Table 10 5 LEDs on the Front Edges of DLCs LED Label LED Color Function L9 L6 Green...

Page 445: ...al signals using pulse code modulation PCM and a sampling rate of 8 kHz or 64 kbps The signals are multiplexed and sent over the PCM bus to the DLC The two ATICs and DLCs in a line card group multiplex all signals over a single PCM bus The two LEDs located on the bottom front of each ATIC labeled PWR and L2 indicate the status of the card The green PWR LED indicates the TIC is receiving 5 Vdc The ...

Page 446: ...removal of fuses from Octel cards Removing fuses from Octel cards invalidates the warranty Table 10 7 provides the fuse rating for each card type that does not have the fuse designation printed on the card Table 10 7 ATIC Fuses by Designator Fuse Designation Qty Fuse Rating F001 F901 10 1 2 A 125 V FA01 FA02 2 1 2 A 125 V F002 F902 10 1 2 A 125 V FB01 FB06 2 1 2 A 125 V SECTION 10 3 ...

Page 447: ...f For continued protection against risk of fire fuses must not be changed for other fuses with different ratings Changing fuses invalidates the warranty Caution Octel Communications does not support the removal of fuses from Octel cards Removing fuses from Octel cards invalidates the warranty Table 10 8 provides the fuse rating for each card type that does not have the fuse designation printed on ...

Page 448: ... T1 TIC is receiving 5 Vdc The red LED L2 indicates the T1 TIC is out of service Figure 10 12 shows the LEDs on the front edge of the card T1 TIC ALARMS Y L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 PWR R Figure 10 12 LEDs on a T1 TIC 10 3 2 5 E1 TICs An E1 TIC provides the interface to support 32 channels Because each DLC has 12 channels three DLCs are required for the E1 TIC in each line card group Two of the 32 ch...

Page 449: ... only ALIGN LED A should light If the ALIGN LED A does not light call the Octel Communications Technical Assistance Center E1 TIC ALARMS LEDs One of the two E1 TIC ALARMS LEDs light when an alarm condition occurs in XC1000 The status log reports the alarm activity These alarms are as follows Red Alarms The red alarm LED is the LED on the right labeled R This alarm indicates that an out of frame OO...

Page 450: ...IC and tests the cabling between the E1 TIC and the switch The P14 jack disconnects the switch and tests the XC1000 Normal Operation LEDs The L9 through L2 and the PWR LEDs are the same as on the CPU Figure 10 13 shows the LEDs and the test jacks on the front edge of the E1 TIC E1TIC ALIGN L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 PWR ALARMS Y R E1TIC ALARM DIAGNOSTIC TEST JACKS NORMAL OPERATION LEDS LEDS A B Figur...

Page 451: ... on the main backplane must be installed Either a 75 ohm coaxial or 120 ohm symmetrical pair connection can be used depending on the CO orMTSO requirements Refer to the appropriate Octel Communications configuration note for additional information about switch requirements Alarm and status LEDs and three diagnostic jacks are located on the front edge of the PTIC These are described as follows ALIG...

Page 452: ...ated toward the top of the cabinet above the main backplane and below the auxiliary shelf A terminal block with two compres sion ring lugs is located on the power distribution shelf and accepts 2 AWG cable from the customer provided power source The power source must be capable of delivering up to 30 amperes of 48 Vdc per cabinet If non hot pluggable 5 Vdc and 12 Vdc power supplies are installed t...

Page 453: ...the capacitor discharges to maintain the input voltage to the 5 Vdc power supplies for approximately 5 ms This input voltage permits the CPU to complete all tasks in progress and prepare to reboot when power is restored The three components of the XC1000 power system are as follows The 48 Vdc power distribution assembly is located on the power distribution shelf The 48 Vdc power control assembly i...

Page 454: ...ies Power for equipment installed in the auxiliary equipment shelf is provided from the power distribution shelf A wire pair runs from the 48 Vdc circuit breaker on the power distribution shelf and is available for equipment on the auxiliary equipment shelf Power supply test points for 5 Vdc and 12 Vdc are located on the distri bution board Refer to section 10 6 for the location of the test points...

Page 455: ...ons TICs to the switch lines or trunks Data and control buses to the CPU file cards monitor card and DLCs 48 Vdc power distribution to ATICs 5 Vdc power and ground to all logic cards PCM bus between DLCs and TICs Figure 10 15 shows the configuration of the main backplane 25 PAIR MALE AMPHENOL CONNECTORS TELEPHONE INTERFACE MAIN BACKPLANE SHIELD CONTROL CARD CONNECTORS TO DISTRIBUTION BOARD 48 VDC ...

Page 456: ...he backplane shield unless directed to by Octel Communications 10 6 MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD The main distribution board is located below the main backplane The distribution board provides connectors for external access to the system These connectors are used for connecting data links the system manager terminal remote alarms and the RDAC port to the XC1000 Refer to section 3 8 for information abou...

Page 457: ... system hardware configuration is set by 10 dip switches located at S2 on the distribution board These switches indicate to the monitor card which alarm status lines are active and should be monitored The switches are set at the factory and do not need to be changed unless the system is reconfigured later Table 10 9 provides a description of each hardware configuration switch An ON setting on the ...

Page 458: ...es The disk backplanes are connected to the main backplane the connection provides a communication path between the file cards and the disk drives 10 7 1 Drive Modules The drive modules are located at the lower front of the XC1000 cabinet Slots for the system drive modules are numbered 0 and 1 on the first shelf system drive shelf Slots used by the message drive modules are num bered M0 to M3 on t...

Page 459: ...ly one terminator board is required for both message drive shelves A jumper connects the two message disk drive backplanes and extends the message drive chain to the lower shelf A terminator board located on the lowest disk drive backplane identifies the end of the message drive bank for the message file card All drives are individually terminated and addressed on the disk controller board located...

Page 460: ...system interface for database management and system maintenance This interface permits technicians to add delete modify and review administrative information for the XC1000 from the SMT The supplied SMT is a Hewlett Packard HP 700 43 computer The terminal is normally connected to XC1000 at the J50 connector on the distribution board using a male to male DB25 cable The RS 232 C interface uses pins ...

Page 461: ...primary SMT port is a data circuit terminating equipment DCE connector Because J43 J44 and J46 are data terminal equipment DTE connectors a null modem adapter must be used with the connectors Any of these connectors can be used but the XC1000 can only support one primary SMT and two second ary SMTs If the monitor card fails or must be removed the SMT can be connected directly to the CPU using the ...

Page 462: ... 3 At the same time the CPU receives through the SMDI data link information identifying the calling party called party and incoming port The CPU notifies the DLC to command the TIC to go off hook and answer the incoming call 4 The CPU instructs the message file card to find the greeting of the called party retrieve the greeting and pass it to the DLC The CPU also instructs the system file card to ...

Page 463: ...XC1000 by hanging up or pressing a disconnect key The DLC detects the caller disconnect or the discon nect command forces the line to the idle state and notifies the CPU using a control bus message 12 The CPU instructs the DLC to go on hook and disconnect the line The DLC disconnects the line and continues polling all TIC ports for a change of status 10 10 HIGHLIGHTS The common control cards in a ...

Page 464: ...0 The XC1000 currently uses two system drives Up to seven message drives can be installed Disk backplanes allow the file cards to communicate with the system and message drives Types of equipment that can be installed in the auxiliary equipment shelf include the following Modems Channel terminating equipment Equipment tray SECTION 10 10 ...

Page 465: ...11 OPTIONAL FEATURES ...

Page 466: ...oubleshooting 11 5 11 4 MULTIPLE TERMINAL ACCESS MTA 11 6 11 5 BUSY OUT CONTROLLER 11 6 11 5 1 Connectivity 11 8 11 5 2 Front Panel 11 8 11 5 2 1 LED Indicators 11 9 11 5 2 2 Error Reporting and Diagnostics 11 10 11 6 STANDBY REDUNDANCY 11 10 11 6 1 Shutdown Conditions 11 12 11 6 2 SMT Switchover Selection 11 12 11 6 3 LED Indicators 11 13 11 6 3 1 CPU LEDs 11 13 11 6 3 2 File Card LEDs 11 14 11 6...

Page 467: ...gure 11 1 Connections Between ACP I O Distribution Boards and the ACP Card 11 3 Figure 11 2 XC1000 Connected to Multiple COs 11 4 Figure 11 3 Example of MTA Configuration 11 7 Figure 11 4 Front Panel of the Busy Out Controller 11 9 Figure 11 5 Switchover Status Information Screen on the SMT 11 11 Figure 11 6 LEDs on the Front Edge of the CPU Card 11 13 Figure 11 7 LEDs on the Front Edge of the Fil...

Page 468: ...le XC1000 The ACP MTA software allows only one administrator at a time to change specified system manager terminal SMT menus and prevents other adminis trators from changing the same information at the same time ACP MTA terminal access to certain SMT menus can be limited by the configuration of the ACP ports associated with the ACP MTA application The ACP board activates multiple switch access MSA...

Page 469: ...116 21 Reserved for future use J116 29 MTA channel 6 J117 22 Reserved for future use J117 30 MTA channel 7 J118 23 Reserved for future use J118 31 ACP I O to CPU port J119 Do not use J119 33 Reserved for future use Null modem cable P N 057 1259 000 required J43 J44 or J46 normally connects to flex ports on the distribution board An F9 status code is entered in the status log when an error involvin...

Page 470: ...rds and the ACP Card Figure 11 2 shows an example of the connections between a single XC1000 and multiple COs In this example the SMDI messages from seven message desk MD numbers are grouped together by the MSLU and channeled to the XC1000 The MSLU also reads message waiting information from the XC1000 and routes it to the appropriate MD Each link to an MSLU must have a unique MD number This 3 dig...

Page 471: ...n Key Description F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 Press F2 to access the configuration menus Refer to Installation Instruction 181 1142 002 and the Multiple SMDI Link Unit MSLU Configuration Note 41 for information about configuration menus After modifying the second configuration menu the CENTREX XC1000 PORT DEFINITION MENU the PC automati cally returns to the MSLU Main Menu Press F3 to load the new configurat...

Page 472: ...11 3 3 Carbon Copy PLUS Troubleshooting Carbon Copy PLUS software installed on the MSLU enables service engineers at remote locations to view activity and to access MSLU operation related functions simultaneously with MSLU operation A brief loss of integration occurs when a service engineer at a remote location calls into the MSLU system using Carbon Copy PLUS software and when accessing the Remot...

Page 473: ...te service access for Octel Communications personnel All XC1000 maintenance should be done from a terminal connected to this port Ports 2 through 4 support 1200 baud terminals or 1200 baud modems for remotely located terminals Ports 5 through 7 support 9600 baud terminals or 9600 baud modems for remotely located terminals MTA port 8 is reserved for connecting the MTA to the J50 connector on the XC...

Page 474: ...ow the 12 Vdc power supply unit at the lower left corner of cabinet 1 in a single or dual cabinet XC1000 The Busy Out Controller acts as a signal relay from the XC1000 to the switch and notifies the switch of any problem conditions on the TIC DLC pairs in the XC1000 Refer to Installation Instruction 181 1104 000 Revision B for more details and installation and configuration procedures for the Busy...

Page 475: ...100 cannot associate a relay contact with a whole UCD group all assigned individual contacts must be activated to busy out an entire analog XC1000 Relay contact 0 can activate a make busy request for the entire system if the XC1000 is configured to do so Refer to Configuration Note 2007 11 5 2 Front Panel The Busy Out Controller is controlled from its front panel The front panel is shown in Figure...

Page 476: ...ont panel shows BSY and RDY LEDs for channels 0 through 24 and ERR and ON LEDs as follows A green RDY LED indicates a ready or nonbusy state on the relay contact channel A yellow BSY LED indicates a busy state on the relay contact channel The green LED labeled ON located under the channel 12 LEDs indicates normal operation of the controller When this LED is flashing the controller is active and ha...

Page 477: ...file cards fail The feature is available only with a dual cabinet XC1000 This functionality is possible because the dual cabinet XC1000 can contain two full sets of the common control cards under special software control To achieve this capability new CPU monitor and file cards must be installed with new CP I O cables and terminator boards The C10 CPU card is replaced with two C20 CPU cards P N 24...

Page 478: ...ive CPU and controls the switchover action The monitor card is not redundant The monitor card maintains a runtime timer to check the CPU If the monitor card does not receive a message from the CPU within 2 minutes the switchover to the standby card set occurs The monitor card also guards against boot failures by monitoring the length of time the boot process takes If the monitor card does not rece...

Page 479: ...ormal system shutdown Power Failure A power failure causes the monitor card to restart the system Upon powering up the monitor card determines the reason for the restart In a XC1000 with Standby Redundancy the monitor card ensures that the same card set that was active before the power failure is rebooted 11 6 2 SMT Switchover Selection The standby redundancy switchover criteria is set according t...

Page 480: ...n Figure 11 6 The standby redundant LEDs are described as follows CP L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 PWR ACT SBY A B PFL TER Figure 11 6 LEDs on the Front Edge of the CPU Card The PFL LED monitors the power from the 12 Vdc power supplies This LED is lit when a power failure occurs The TER LED is lit when terminator error exists The small computer system interface SCSI terminators are in an incorrect posit...

Page 481: ... LED is lit when the CPU is in standby mode 11 6 3 2 File Card LEDs The file card LEDs are located on the front edge of the file card as shown in Figure 11 7 The standby redundant file cards include the following LEDs FILE L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 PWR DDA SDA DDR SDR DAT DCC DSO DRY DPF DWV TER A B ACT SBY Figure 11 7 LEDs on the Front Edge of the File Card SECTION 11 6 ...

Page 482: ...og entries for standby redundancy The location codes for the card slots in a redundant XC1000 are different from the location codes for the card slots in a nonredundant XC1000 Redundant card slot location codes are shown in Table 11 3 Table 11 3 Standby Redundancy Card Slot Location Codes Location Code Redundant Card Nonredundant Card Cabinet 1 06 System File A side System File 01 System File B Si...

Page 483: ... menus simultaneously from a single XC1000 The Busy Out Controller allows callers to hear a busy signal rather than hearing a ring with no answer The Busy Out Controller can be used in conjunction with the analog TIC DLC Hot Plug feature The Standby Redundancy feature allows a dual cabinet XC1000 to contain a second set of common control cards to allow rapid recovery if there is a failure in one o...

Page 484: ...Conversion Instructions Chapter Eighteen Release 4 0 Online Upgrade Instructions Chapter Nineteen Release 4 0 System Utilities The upgrade instructions provide procedures for running validity checks and garbage collect backing up system drive 0 upgrading the hardware software and phrases to system drives converting system distribution lists to mailboxes configuring serial channel parameters and en...

Page 485: ...12 RELEASE 1 55 UPGRADE INSTRUCTIONS ...

Page 486: ...12 17 12 10 1 Define CPU Serial Channels in Menu 6 3 12 18 12 10 1 1 Configure the Serial Channels 12 19 12 10 1 2 Configure a System Manager Terminal 12 19 12 10 1 3 Configure a CPU Channel for Direct Integration 12 21 12 10 2 Configure MTA Parameters in Menu 6 4 12 21 12 10 3 Manage Integration Links in Menu 6 5 12 23 12 10 3 1 Add an Integration Link 12 23 12 10 3 2 Change an Integration Link 1...

Page 487: ...Figure 12 9 Top and Side Views of a SIMM Installation 12 12 Figure 12 10 Copying New Software to System Drive 0 12 14 Figure 12 11 Example of Screen Display That Appears When Option 14 Is Selected From the Reformat Menu 12 16 Figure 12 12 Example of Screen Display of Conversion of Distribution Lists to Mailbox Numbers 12 17 Figure 12 13 Menu 6 Dialing and Serial Channel Parameters 12 18 Figure 12 ...

Page 488: ...ure 12 1 shows a flowchart of the upgrade This procedure usually requires that the XC1000 be out of service for at least 3 hours This time can vary depending on the XC1000 configuration UPGRADE SYSTEM DRIVE 0 REQUEST SERVICE OPTION BE ENABLED PRINT MENUS VERIFY THAT ALL REQUIRED EQUIPMENT IS AVAILABLE RUN VALIDITY CHECKS AND GARBAGE COLLECT BACK UP SYSTEM DRIVE 0 UPGRADE SYSTEM DRIVE 1 INSTALL NEW...

Page 489: ...on U10V V3 monitor card One of the following V3 monitor cards and associated EPROMs are required V3 monitor card P N 044 2030 000 with an EPROM P N 039 1267 002 Rev 9003 or higher at location U7N V3 monitor card P N 044 2030 001 with an EPROM P N 039 1380 000 Rev 9100 or higher at location U7N V3 1 monitor card P N 044 2030 002 with an EPROM P N 039 1380 001 Rev 9202 or higher at location U7N For ...

Page 490: ...tter key then type the second letter key For example DC indicates pressing the Ctrl and D keys simultaneously then pressing the C key Only the last letter typed appears on the screen Make sure that system drives 0 and 1 are installed by checking menu 12 then perform the following steps 1 Enter the system manager password to access the Main Menu on the system manager terminal SMT 2 Access the follo...

Page 491: ... 8 When the prompt CHECK DONE PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE appears press any key then verify that no errors were reported for any mailboxes from the printouts Correct any damaged user records that are found before continuing with the software upgrade 9 At the prompt type REFORMAT again and press the Enter key 10 When the reformat menu reappears Figure 12 2 type 10 and press the Enter key to select th...

Page 492: ...e collect Access Menu 18 X 25 Interface Management from the Main Menu 3 From menu 18 select option 3 to access menu 18 3 X 25 Interface Operation 4 In the Physical Interface Number field enter the number of the XC1000 DB25 connector to which the X 25 link is connected and press the Enter key Valid interface numbers are 0 and 1 5 In response to the prompt at the bottom of the screen in menu 18 3 ty...

Page 493: ...continue to the second pass ENTER DRIVE TO GARBAGE COLLECT 0 15 OR ANY KEY FOR ALL DRIVES BEGIN GARBAGE COLLECT ALL PORTS ARE CLEAR BEGIN FIRST PASS SC ERRORS 0 I O ERRORS 0 MESSAGES DESTINATIONS 13 OF USERS WITH ERROR 0 OF NODES WITH ERROR 0 ENTER Y TO CHANGE USER RECORDS AND UPDATE FREE SPACE TABLES ENTER N TO LEAVE SYSTEM UNCHANGED Figure 12 3 Garbage Collect First Pass 13 Upon completion of th...

Page 494: ...nter the INSTALL OPTIONS menu 7 Select option D INITIALIZE DRIVE to initialize the backup drive in slot 2 as a system drive 8 When the backup drive is initialized press C twice to exit to the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt 9 Type DC at the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt to enter the COPY OPTIONS menu as shown in Figure 12 5 10 Type D to select the SYSTEM ALL OF THE ABOVE option to copy the software phrases ...

Page 495: ...YYYYYYY CONTINUE Y OR N WILL DESTINATION DRIVE BE A REPLACEMENT Y OR N N VERIFYING SOURCE COPYING VERIFYING DESTINATION COPY COMPLETE PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE Figure 12 6 System Drive 0 Backup to Drive 2 12 7 UPGRADE THE HARDWARE Make sure that the XC1000 has the appropriate level of hardware installed before performing the software upgrade Refer to section 12 2 for a list of the correct hardware...

Page 496: ...ace the monitor card with the appropriate revision of the card or firmware 5 Check all DLCs If they do not match the requirements listed in section 12 2 replace the DLCs with the appropriate revision of the card or firmware 6 Check all T1 TICs if used If they do not match the requirements listed in section 12 2 replace the T1 TICs with the appropriate revision of the card or firmware 7 Check the A...

Page 497: ...tatic electricity Caution 2 Remove the CPU from the XC1000 and place it on an electrostatic dissipative surface Position the CPU so that the SIMMs are at the upper right side of the card as shown in Figure 12 7 ËËËË ËËËË ËËËËËË U2D OCTEL P N U3D U5D U6D U8D U9D U10D U11D 1 2 3 4 O N S1 Figure 12 7 Location of SIMMs on the CPU 3 Locate the eight SIMMs P Ns 035 1023 000 installed in socket locations...

Page 498: ...2 8 until the SIMM is partially released 6 Insert the round embossment on the tool head into the hole in the left side of the same SIMM 7 While pushing down on the positioning pin with the tool gently lift the tool handle up and to the left counterclockwise until the SIMM is partially released 8 After both right and left edges of the SIMM have been loosened remove the SIMM by lifting it straight u...

Page 499: ...e SIMM are above the positioning pins Refer to Figure 12 9 as a guide for inserting the SIMM into the socket SOCKET SIMM SOCKET a Top View b Side View SIMM ËËËËË POSITIONING PIN Figure 12 9 Top and Side Views of a SIMM Installation Using both thumbs firmly and carefully press down on the top edge of the SIMM until it clicks into place on both sides If the SIMM is not fully seated intermittent oper...

Page 500: ...and that dip switches on S1 are set correctly 20 When the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt appears turn off power to the XC1000 and allow the drives to spin all the way down until the actuator clicks If the XC1000 passes all power on tests proceed to section 12 8 Discard the old SIMMs 12 8 UPGRADE NEW SOFTWARE AND PHRASES TO SYSTEM DRIVES Perform the following steps to copy software and phrases from the ...

Page 501: ...2 10 Copying New Software to System Drive 0 11 When the PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE prompt appears press any key to return to the COPY OPTIONS menu 12 When the COPY OPTIONS menu appears Figure 12 5 type B and Enter to select the PHRASES option which copies the system phrases from the master drive to system drive 0 If the IVR phrases have been customized copy only the system phrases using suboptions ...

Page 502: ...EY TO CONTINUE prompt appears press any key to return to the COPY OPTIONS menu 27 When the COPY OPTIONS menu reappears type B and press Enter to select the PHRASES option which copies the phrases from system drive 0 to system drive 1 Use suboptions B A A when copying phrases from system drive 0 to system drive 1 All phrases and languages must be copied at this time If any other options are selecte...

Page 503: ...lboxes Continue Y N prompt type Y Figure 12 11 shows an example of the screen that appears after selecting option 14 The conversion can be a lengthy process the time depending on the system configuration Enter selection 14 WAITING FOR ALL PORTS TO CLEAR System Distribution Lists will be converted to mailboxes Continue Y N Y Checking for space please wait Your System Distribution Lists are currentl...

Page 504: ... 5 7 4 4 9 5 PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE Figure 12 12 Example of Screen Display of Conversion of Distribution Lists to Mailbox Numbers 10 Turn off continuous printing mode by pressing the Copy Pr key on the HP 700 43 terminal or the Ctrl Shift and Print keys simulta neously on the Wyse 50 terminal 11 At the PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE prompt press any key to return to the prompt 12 At the prompt type ...

Page 505: ...sical connectors Table 12 1 XC1000 CPU Serial Channels and Physical Connectors Channel Physical 1 J44 Integration SMT 2 J43 Integration SMT 3 J46 Integration SMT 4 J50 Service Primary SMTa J45 Service Primary SMTb RDAC Remote Diagnostic Access Connector Number Function a Monitor card installed b No monitor card installed The primary SMT port is a data circuit terminating equipment DCE connector Be...

Page 506: ... 4 is configured for the primary SMT and for local service It cannot be changed although some information about channel 4 can be updated When the Remote Diagnostic Assistance Center RDAC is in use channel 4 is disabled and vice versa A system management channel can be used for PC based MTA for a system manager terminal SMT or based on an asynchronous communications processor ACP multiple terminal ...

Page 507: ... channel replacing the method of pressing the Break key twice The baud rate setting on the system manager terminal itself is still configured using the Shift Setup keys as described in Chapter Three of the Release 1 XC1000 System Manager Manual 6 In the Type of Terminal on This Channel field enter 1 2 or 3 for one of the following terminal types 1 Wyse 50 or HP 700 43 2 AT T 4425 5425 3 DEC VT102 ...

Page 508: ... Send key to save the changes The changes entered appear immediately in the Stored Type column for the selected channel but do not appear in the Active Type column and are not implemented until the XC1000 reboots If desired repeat these steps to configure another channel for direct CPU integration These integration links can be reviewed by accessing menu 6 5 and selecting option 3 Review Integrati...

Page 509: ...minal Channel Configure the MTA channels for ACP based terminals as follows 1 From menu 6 select option 4 for MTA parameters Figure 12 13 and menu 6 4 appears 2 From menu 6 4 Select one of the following options 1 Configure MTA Terminals 2 Review MTA Terminal Select 1 Configure MTA Terminals and menu 6 4 1 appears Figure 12 15 3 In the MTA Terminal Number field enter the number of the terminal to b...

Page 510: ...struction 181 1036 002 for 386 PCs 12 10 3 Manage Integration Links in Menu 6 5 Use menu 6 5 to configure integration links connected to the RS 232 ports on the distribution board or to the ACP I O distribution boards After the links are added in menu 6 5 1 they are managed by using the remaining submenus of menu 6 5 including changing link configuration reviewing an integration link deleting an i...

Page 511: ...MDI 5 For the Baud Rate field select one of the following 0 1200 baud 1 2400 baud 2 4800 baud 3 9600 baud 4 19 2K baud 6 For the Number of Data Bits field select one of the following 0 7 data bits 1 8 data bits 7 For the Number of Stop Bits field select one of the following 0 1 stop bit 1 2 stop bits 8 For the Parity Odd Even field select one of the following 0 no parity 1 odd parity 2 even parity...

Page 512: ... a DMS 100 make sure to change the number of digits back from 4 to 7 to in the Number of Digits in Extension Used for Message Waiting field after the upgrade is completed 12 In the Max Msg Waiting Operations per second field enter a number from 1 to 4 if the baud rate is 1200 or from 1 to 5 if the baud rate is 9600 Figure 12 17 shows an example of a completed screen for menu 6 5 1 Add as many link...

Page 513: ...eset an Integration Link Resetting an integration link from menu 6 5 5 replaces the previous method of resetting a link from menu 13 6 To reset an integration link perform the following steps 1 From menu 6 5 select option 5 Menu 6 5 5 appears with only the Enter Integration Link Number field displayed 2 Enter the link number and the Link Number and Link Name column heads appear with the designated...

Page 514: ...3 Press C to return to the Main Menu 12 12 RETURN THE XC1000 TO SERVICE 1 If the number of digits was changed in menu 1 1 for a DMS 100 change the number of digits back to 7 in the Number of Digits in Extension Used for Message Waiting field after the upgrade is completed 2 Enable all multiline hunt groups and SMDI links to the XC1000 so that calls are again directed to XC1000 Use one of the follo...

Page 515: ...Service System drive 0 backed up Hardware upgraded Software upgraded New software and phrases copied to system drives Existing system distribution lists converted to type 6 mailboxes Serial channel parameters configured XC1000 returned to service SECTION 12 13 ...

Page 516: ...13 RELEASE 2 X UPGRADE INSTRUCTIONS ...

Page 517: ...ORDS TO USER RECORDS 13 13 13 11 CONVERT SYSTEM DISTRIBUTION LISTS TO MAILBOXES 13 13 13 12 MOVE COMPANY RECORDS AND ATTENDANT SCHEDULES TO USER RECORDS 13 15 13 13 RUN ON LINE VALIDITY CHECKS AND GARBAGE COLLECT 13 15 13 13 1 Run Validity Checks 13 16 13 13 2 Run Garbage Collect 13 17 13 14 CONFIGURE THE SERIAL CHANNEL PARAMETERS 13 18 13 14 1 Define CPU Serial Channels in Menu 6 3 13 19 13 14 1 ...

Page 518: ...NABLE THE SPECIAL MESSAGE WAITING FEATURE FOR SMDI INTEGRATIONS 13 27 13 16 RETURN THE XC1000 TO SERVICE 13 28 13 17 UPDATE INSTRUCTIONS 13 28 13 17 1 Enable the Service Option 13 28 13 17 2 Run Online Validity Checks 13 29 13 17 3 Run Garbage Collect 13 30 13 17 4 Take XC1000 Out of Service 13 32 13 17 5 Back Up System Drive 0 13 32 13 17 6 Upgrade New Software and Phrases to System Drives 13 34 ...

Page 519: ... Selecting Option 14 From the Reformat Menu 13 14 Figure 13 10 Example of Screen Showing Conversion of Distribution Lists to Mailbox Numbers 13 15 Figure 13 11 Reformat Menu 13 16 Figure 13 12 Garbage Collect First Pass 13 17 Figure 13 13 Garbage Collect Second Pass 13 18 Figure 13 14 Menu 6 Dialing and Serial Channel Parameters 13 19 Figure 13 15 Example of Menu 6 3 Define CPU Serial Channel 13 2...

Page 520: ...ollect Second Pass 13 32 Figure 13 23 COPY OPTIONS Menu 13 33 Figure 13 24 Example of a Completed Screen for Copying the System Drive 0 Backup to Drive 2 13 33 Figure 13 25 Example of a Completed Screen for Copying New Software to System Drive 0 13 34 Page ...

Page 521: ...for SMDI integrations 18 Return the XC1000 to service Figure 12 1 shows a flowcharted overview of the upgrade This upgrade usually requires that the XC1000 be out of service for at least 3 hours This time can vary depending on the XC1000 configuration The procedure for updating a XC1000 to a new version of Release 2 X from a previous version of 2 X is described in section 13 17 This procedure also...

Page 522: ...1000 Upgrade C20 CPU card with 16 MB of RAM P N 244 2053 011 with the following EPROMs Low byte EPROM P N 039 1402 001 at location U18J High byte EPROM P N 039 1403 001 at location U17J If the XC1000 uses more than 72 ports the Turbo C20 CPU card P N 244 2053 025 is required with the following EPROMs Low byte EPROM P N 039 1402 001 at location U18J High byte EPROM P N 039 1403 001 at location U17J...

Page 523: ...386 processor must have the following EPROMs Low byte EPROMs P N 039 1372 000 Rev 9101 at location U18J High byte EPROMs P N 039 1373 000 Rev 9101 at location U16J The ACP188 processor must have an EPROM P N 039 1408 001 Rev 9203 EMI shielding kit P N 178 1083 000 If T1 TICs are used P N 044 2002 000 with the following EPROMs Low byte EPROMs P N 039 1289 000 Rev 9000A at location U5T High byte EPR...

Page 524: ... data module connected 3 At the Main Menu type the current date in the format mmdd as the menu selection For example January 9 would be 109 and December 15 would be 1215 Press the Enter key The service prompt appears 4 At the prompt turn on continuous mode printing by pressing the Copy Pr key on the HP terminal or the Ctrl Shift and Print keys simultaneously on the Wyse 50 terminal This allows the...

Page 525: ...2 When the prompt CHECK DONE PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE appears press any key then verify that no errors were reported for any mailbox from the printouts If any damaged user records are found contact the Octel Communications Technical Assistance Center before continuing with the software upgrade 13 At the prompt type REFORMAT and press the Enter key 14 When the reformat menu appears Figure 12 2 typ...

Page 526: ...om the Main Menu type the current date as the menu selection in the format mmdd Press the Enter key 7 At the prompt turn on continuous mode printing by pressing the Copy Pr key on the HP terminal or the Ctrl Shift and Print keys simultaneously on the Wyse 50 terminal This allows the results of the garbage collect utility to be printed All screens will begin printing starting with the reformat menu...

Page 527: ...AGES DESTINATIONS 13 OF USERS WITH ERROR 0 OF NODES WITH ERROR 0 PORT MSGS BLKS BOS TOT BOS ACT 31 13 30 451310 409468 TOTAL 13 30 451310 409468 GARBAGE COLLECTION SUCCESSFUL PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE Figure 13 4 Garbage Collect Second Pass 14 When the GARBAGE COLLECTION SUCCESSFUL prompt appears turn off continuous printing mode by pressing the Copy Pr key on the HP terminal or the Ctrl Shift and...

Page 528: ...ET THE CDR POINTERS I DISK UTILITY J PHRASE RECORD UTILITY K REPLACE DRIVE U UPGRADE SYSTEM DRIVE V VERIFY DRIVE FOR INTEGRITY X EXIT SELECT COPY OPTION Figure 13 5 COPY OPTIONS Menu 9 Type D to select the SYSTEM ALL OF THE ABOVE option to copy the software phrases and database from drive 0 to drive 2 The source is drive 0 the alternate source is drive 1 and the destina tion is drive 2 Verify that...

Page 529: ...nection XC1000 functionality could be impaired Caution 1 Check the CPU card If the CPU does not match the requirements listed in section 13 2 replace the CPU with the appropriate hardware from the upgrade kit Make sure the resistor packs are in the correct location on the CPU card as follows a Locate the resistor packs at locations RP10 RP19 and RP20 These packs are located around U19F at the uppe...

Page 530: ...monitor card with the appropriate hardware from the upgrade kit 4 Check all DLCs If they do not match the requirements listed in section 13 2 replace the DLCs with the appropriate hardware from the upgrade kit 5 Check all T1 TICs If they do not match the requirements listed in section 13 2 replace the T1 TICs with the appropriate hardware from the upgrade kit 6 Check the ACP EPROMs If they do not ...

Page 531: ...prompt type DC to enter the COPY OPTIONS menu 9 When the COPY OPTIONS menu appears Figure 13 5 type U and press the Enter key to select the UPGRADE SYSTEM DRIVE option which copies the software from the master drive to system drive 0 10 Answer the prompts as they appear Figure 12 10 shows the com pleted screen for this copy operation Verify that the serial numbers displayed for the source and dest...

Page 532: ... Return system drive 0 to system drive slot 0 20 Return system drive 1 to system drive slot 1 21 Turn on power to XC1000 22 When the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt appears type DC to enter the COPY OPTIONS menu 23 When the COPY OPTIONS menu appears type U and press the Enter key to select the UPGRADE SYSTEM DRIVE option which copies the software from system drive 0 to system drive 1 System drive 0 is n...

Page 533: ...ork nodes found during the boot process If no network nodes have been established steps 1 and 2 are not necessary Continue to step 3 unless the following prompt appears Statistics report type N one S ummary D etailed It may take much longer time for a detailed report Choose one Enter D 2 The following prompt appears Make sure the printer or disk is ready to capture statistics Hit Y key when ready ...

Page 534: ... mailboxes Continue Y N Y Checking for space please wait Your System Distribution Lists are currently numbered 26 through 85 Each non empty list will be converted to a mailbox and assigned a mailbox number based on the starting number you specify i e if your starting mailbox number is 9026 then System Distribution List 26 will be assigned mailbox number 9026 Enter a 4 digit number for the start of...

Page 535: ...ion of Distribution Lists to Mailbox Numbers 13 12 MOVE COMPANY RECORDS AND ATTENDANT SCHEDULES TO USER RECORDS Complete the following steps to convert communities and attendant schedules to user records 1 If the procedure in section 13 11 was not performed enter the date at the Main Menu in the format mmdd and press Enter 2 At the prompt type REFORMAT and press the Enter key 3 When the reformat m...

Page 536: ... key to select the Validity check user records option 3 When the prompt ENTER Y TO CONFIRM USER RECORD VALIDITY CHECK appears type Y and press the Enter key 4 When the prompt CHECK DONE PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE appears press any key then verify that no errors were reported for any mailboxes from the printouts If any damaged user records are found contact the Octel Communications Technical Assista...

Page 537: ...key when the ENTER DRIVE TO GARBAGE COLLECT M0 M7 OR A FOR ALL DRIVES prompt appears 3 At the Do you want a long garbage collect y n prompt enter Y 4 Garbage collect consists of two passes After the first pass is com plete scramble codes SC and I O errors are reported The results are reported on a screen similar to the one in Figure 13 12 If any errors are detected during the first pass contact th...

Page 538: ... Garbage Collect Complete message appears turn off continuous printing mode by pressing the Copy Pr key on the HP terminal or the Ctrl Shift and Print keys on the Wyse 50 terminal 7 Press any key to return to the prompt 8 Type C to return to the Main Menu 9 If the X 25 link was stopped in section 13 5 restart the link using menu 18 3 13 14 CONFIGURE THE SERIAL CHANNEL PARAMETERS These procedures a...

Page 539: ...ical connectors The primary SMT port is a data circuit terminating equipment DCE connector Because J43 J44 and J46 are data terminal equipment DTE connectors a null modem adapter must be used with the connectors Any of these connectors can be used but the XC1000 can only support one primary SMT and two secondary SMTs Table 13 1 XC1000 CPU Serial Channels and Physical Connectors 1 J44 Integration S...

Page 540: ...annels or as additional SMTs Serial channel 4 is configured for the primary SMT and for local service It cannot be changed although some information about channel 4 can be updated When the Remote Diagnostic Assistance Center RDAC is in use channel 4 is disabled and vice versa A system management channel can be used for PC based MTA for an SMT or an ACP installed for MTA If only one channel is need...

Page 541: ...Terminal on This Channel field select one of the following 1 Wyse 50 or HP 700 43 2 AT T 4425 5425 3 DEC VT102 220 7 Press the Send key to save the changes The changes entered appear in the Stored Type field for channel 4 but not in the Active Type field until the XC1000 has been rebooted If desired repeat these steps to configure another system manager termi nal The changes entered appear in the ...

Page 542: ...iewed by accessing menu 6 5 and selecting option 3 Review Integration Links on System Select option 6 Integration Link Status from menu 6 5 to display error and status information for each integration link To reset an integration link select option 5 from menu 6 5 refer to section 13 14 3 5 13 14 2 Configure MTA Parameters in Menu 6 4 If the XC1000 is currently using PC based MTA each terminal s a...

Page 543: ...e MTA Terminals and menu 6 4 1 appears Figure 13 16 3 In the MTA Terminal Number field enter the number of the terminal to be defined 4 In the Baud Rate field enter one of the following 1 1200 baud 2 2400 baud 3 4800 baud 4 9600 baud 5 If only the baud rate is changed it is stored If the baud rate is changed for the terminal being used the terminal must be logged out and then logged in again for t...

Page 544: ...ed in menu 6 5 1 they are managed by using the remaining submenus of menu 6 5 including changing link configuration reviewing an integration link deleting an integration link resetting an integration link and viewing the status of an integration link If an SMDI integration is currently connected at J44 J43 or J46 it must be configured in menus 6 3 and 6 5 From menu 6 Figure 13 14 select option 5 f...

Page 545: ...XON XOFF 1 ignore XON XOFF Select 1 for all switch types except the DMS 100 SL 100 with 1X67 Revision BC or BD ACP I O integration which uses XON XOFF integration 10 For the Carrier Detect field select one of the following 0 use carrier detect 1 ignore carrier detect 11 To check link status for SMDI integration enter an invalid extension in the Extension to Check SMDI Message Waiting field For DMS...

Page 546: ...ation Link Changing an integration link is similar to adding a link as detailed in section 13 14 3 1 To change an integration link select option 2 from menu 6 5 The same fields appear in menu 6 5 2 as in menu 6 5 1 except that the fields are already completed Changes can be made in the fields as applicable 13 14 3 3 Review an Integration Link To review an integration link select option 3 from menu...

Page 547: ...appear on the screen 3 After viewing the first screen press the Enter key to continue The second screen appears displaying the LTN numbers associated with that link 4 After viewing the second screen press any key to continue to the third screen which displays any ring or RS 232 mismatches 5 Type C to clear the statistics or press the Enter key to return to the first screen 13 15 ENABLE THE SPECIAL...

Page 548: ...0 answer properly 4 Return the XC1000 to the system manager Inform the system manager that FF errors might appear in the status log but can be ignored 13 17 UPDATE INSTRUCTIONS If the software in the XC1000 is being updated from Release 2 X to a newer version of 2 X use the update procedure instead of the upgrade procedure because it is faster The major steps when updating software to a new Releas...

Page 549: ...would be 1215 Press the Enter key The service prompt appears 4 At the prompt turn on continuous mode printing by pressing the Copy Pr key on the HP terminal or the Ctrl Shift and Print keys simultaneously on the Wyse 50 terminal This allows the results of the validity check and garbage collect utilities to be printed All screens will be printed starting with the reformat menu 5 At the prompt type ...

Page 550: ... REFORMAT and press the Enter key 14 When the reformat menu reappears Figure 13 20 type 11 and press the Enter key to select the Check AMT vs user records option 15 When the prompt ENTER Y TO CONFIRM THE AMT UR CROSS CHECK appears type Y and press the Enter key 16 When the prompt CHECK DONE PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE appears press any key then verify that no errors were reported for any mailbox fro...

Page 551: ...date drive s y n prompt and press the Enter key to continue with the second pass Scramble Code Errors 0 I O Errors 0 Messages Destinations 0 AMIS EARS 0 Users with bad messages 0 Users with bad grouplists 0 Nodes with bad messages 0 bad IVR Directory messages 0 bad AMIS Directory messages 0 bad FAX queue messages 0 Press any key to continue 05 MAR 93 Garbage Collection 01 24 59PM Port Msgs Blks BO...

Page 552: ... line hunt groups and SMDI links connected to the XC1000 by using one of the following methods Divert the pilot number of the multiple line hunt group Remove the RS 232 connectors from the SMDI connections on the main backplane Disable all line tasks in menu 4 Use the busy out controller to make all ports busy 3 All operations from this point must be performed from the service primary SMT connecte...

Page 553: ...IVE FOR INTEGRITY X EXIT SELECT COPY OPTION Figure 13 23 COPY OPTIONS Menu 9 Type D to select the SYSTEM ALL OF THE ABOVE option to copy the software phrases and database from drive 0 to drive 2 The source is drive 0 the alternate source is drive 1 and the destination is drive 2 Verify that the serial numbers displayed for source and destination drives are correct The destination drive is not a re...

Page 554: ...ccurs because the master drive is in slot 0 and system drive 0 is in slot 1 6 When the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt appears type DR to access the terminal selection screen and verify the current terminal type Change the terminal type selection if necessary 7 Type X and press the Enter key to exit the terminal selection screen 8 From the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt type DC to access the COPY OPTIONS men...

Page 555: ...e screen for the source and destination drives are correct then type Y to continue 17 When the PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE prompt appears press any key to return to the COPY OPTIONS menu 18 Type X and then press Enter to return to the ENTER BOOT COM MAND prompt 19 Turn off power to the XC1000 and allow the drives to spin all the way down until the actuator clicks 20 Remove the master drive and set i...

Page 556: ...fresh then boot with an A Booting the XC1000 can be a lengthy process the duration depends on the system configuration 13 17 7 Run Online Validity Checks After the XC1000 has been upgraded to Release 2 X the validity checks and garbage collect can be run while the XC1000 is on line Running validity checks and garbage collect can cause a long delay Perform the following steps to run validity checks...

Page 557: ...OSS CHECK appears type Y and press the Enter key 14 When the prompt CHECK DONE PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE appears press any key then verify that no errors were reported for any mailbox from the printouts made in section 13 17 2 If there are any discrepancies contact the Octel Communications Technical Assistance Center before continuing with the upgrade 13 17 8 Run Garbage Collect Perform the follow...

Page 558: ...ould be heard Make sure that all ports on the XC1000 answer properly 3 Return the XC1000 to the system manager 13 18 HIGHLIGHTS Before upgrading a XC1000 to Release 2 X all required equipment must be available The upgrade to Release 2 X requires the following procedures Service option enabled Validity checks run Garbage collect run System drive 0 backed up Hardware upgraded EMI shielding installed...

Page 559: ...14 RELEASE 3 02 FCP CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS ...

Page 560: ... GARBAGE COLLECT 14 11 14 6 1 Printing Relevant Menus 14 11 14 6 2 Running Validity Checks and Garbage Collect 14 11 14 7 LOAD MIRROR SOFTWARE FCP CONVERSION TOOL AND SOFTWARE AND PHRASE DISKETTES 14 13 14 7 1 Installing SoftKlone MIRROR III Software Version 2 5 14 14 14 7 2 Installing FCP Conversion Tool 1 01A 14 16 14 7 3 Loading Software and Phrases From Diskettes Onto PC Hard Drive 14 17 14 8 ...

Page 561: ...Figure 14 8 Example of UPG Information Screen for Verifying That the Correct Diskettes Are Being Added to the Hard Drive 14 18 Figure 14 9 Screen for Confirming That the UPG Diskette Loading Is Complete 14 19 Figure 14 10 Example of the Select UPG Utility Menu 14 20 Figure 14 11 Display UPG Information Screen 14 20 Figure 14 12 Representation of the PC to XC1000 Connection 14 21 Figure 14 13 Selec...

Page 562: ... OPTIONS Menu for Releases 1 5X and 2 X 14 28 Figure 14 22 Instruction Screen for Upgrading New File Card EPROM 14 30 Figure 14 23 Instruction Screen for Verifying Drives and Running Reformat Options 10 and 11 14 32 Figure 14 24 Menu 20 Service Operations With a Warning To Press the F12 Key To Continue Conversion 14 32 Figure 14 25 Menu 20 1 Drive Verify Utilities 14 33 Figure 14 26 Reformat Menu ...

Page 563: ...ing an FCP conversion Do not attempt to perform an FCP conversion from software releases older than Releases 1 5X or 2 X The FCP conversion will fail Caution If the XC1000 is currently at a release older than Release 1 5X or 2 X upgrade the XC1000 to Release 1 5X or 2 X before beginning an FCP conversion Order the appropriate upgrade kit from Octel to upgrade the XC1000 to Release 1 5X or 2 X The ...

Page 564: ...ive replacement procedures within the XC1000 Service Manual Release 3 02 does not support the Infotex application Do not perform an FCP conversion if the XC1000 has Infotex Caution Release 3 02 does not support the InfoTex application If the InfoTex application is present on the XC1000 disable the application If a TransAct version before Release 2 0 is installed on the XC1000 a phrase limit of 130...

Page 565: ...ll new equipment at this time simply make sure that the equipment is already installed or that replacement equipment is on hand Do not begin an FCP conversion unless all equipment is available Caution Specific procedural steps have been defined for physically upgrading any necessary hardware or software 14 3 1 Determining Hardware for the PC and the XC1000 The following hardware is a mixture of eq...

Page 566: ...25 pin male connections two female female DB25 DB25 gender changer adapters P N 003 1092 000 Printer and hardware connectors The following hardware is required for the XC1000 One spare drive for making a backup copy depending on the size of current system drives 380 MB Maxtor drive module P N 012 2007 000 or 760 MB Maxtor drive module P N 012 2022 000 The FCP conversion will fail if the XC1000 has...

Page 567: ...talled in the XC1000 by the end of the FCP conversion as noted If the installed firmware differs in part number and revision before the FCP conversion make sure that new firmware is available to be upgraded during the FCP conversion If you have questions or concerns about EPROM configurations and part numbers contact your Octel sales representative CPU C20 turbo EPROMs Low byte P N 039 1402 001 re...

Page 568: ...41 000 revision 9302 or higher High byte P N 039 1440 000 revision 9302 or higher If T1 TIC cards are installed they must have the following EPROMs installed Low byte P N 039 1289 000 revision 9000 or higher High byte P N 039 1290 000 revision 9000 or higher If ACP 10 cards are installed they must have the following EPROMs installed Low byte P N 039 1372 000 revision A 9101 or higher High byte P N...

Page 569: ...nto diskette drive A or B if appropriate 2 At the DOS C prompt type A or B if appropriate and press the Enter key 3 At the A prompt type install and press the Enter key 4 When the Press Esc to quit any other key to continue prompt appears press any key A list of computers supported by the software appears on the screen 5 Use the down arrow key to select the Toshiba 4500 4500c option then press the...

Page 570: ...n now be used as the COM2 port for the FCP conversion 19 If the card is not recognized as the COM2 port a message appears stating that the card is not recognized Turn off the power to the PC and double check that the PCMCIA card is tightly seated If the card is still not recognized perform the following steps a Turn off the power to the PC b Remove the PCMCIA from the bottom slot c Remove the top ...

Page 571: ... conversion if the user record availability does not meet the requirements The FCP conversion will fail if there are not enough available user records Caution To calculate whether enough extra user records are available use the following example 1 Retrieve values at offsets 22 and 23 from SST At the SMT Main Menu type the date in mmdd format and press the Return key At the prompt type rs and press...

Page 572: ...mum If the user record allocation is already at its maximum and the XC1000 does not meet the extra user record requirement for an FCP conversion delete user records or mailboxes until the requirement can be met Perform the following steps to determine which mailboxes are uninitialized and can be deleted 1 Make sure that a printer is connected to the back of the system manager terminal connected to...

Page 573: ...rminal or the Ctrl Shift and Print keys simultaneously on the Wyse 50 terminal to begin continuous print mode 3 From the SMT Main Menu select and print the following menus Menus 1 1 and 1 2 Menu 2 and all submenus Menu 4 if not already printed in section 14 4 Menu 5 Menus 6 1 6 2 and 6 3 Menu 12 Menus 13 2 13 4 13 7 13 8 and 13 10 Menus 15 1 2 and 15 2 with all submenus 4 Turn the printer off 14 6...

Page 574: ...e 0 8 Turn off message waiting indicator for special mailbox waiting 10 Check user records vs AMT 11 Check AMT addresses vs internal record numbers 12 Patch up clobbered user records with bad lengths 13 Convert ICMB from COS to MB 14 Convert System Distribution Lists to Mailboxes Enter selection Figure 14 2 Reformat Menu for Release 2 X 3 Type 0 and press the Return key to select 0 Validity check ...

Page 575: ...e ENTER Y TO CHANGE USER RECORDS AND UPDATE FREE SPACE TABLES ENTER N TO LEAVE SYSTEM UNCHANGED prompt type Y and press the Return key to continue d When GARBAGE COLLECTION SUCCESSFUL PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE appears press the Return key e Press C to return to the SMT Main Menu Leave the XC1000 as is for the moment 14 7 LOAD MIRROR SOFTWARE FCP CONVERSION TOOL AND SOFTWARE AND PHRASE DISKETTES Pe...

Page 576: ...te into diskette drive a or b if appropriate 2 At the DOS C prompt type a or b and press the Enter key 3 At the A or B prompt type install and press the Enter key An INSTALLATION MENU appears 4 Select the Mirror III 2 5 option by pressing the Enter key 5 A MIRROR INSTALLATION screen appears briefly that describes the installation At the Press to begin installation or ESC to return to DOS prompt pr...

Page 577: ...Press the Shift and keys simultaneously to select all emulations Then press the Alt and S keys simultaneously to copy files The SAMPLE SCRIPTS PRISM DEVELOPMENT FILES screen appears with a brief description of available sample scripts and PRISM files 17 Press the Enter key and the second SAMPLE SCRIPTS PRISM DEVELOPMENT FILES screen appears 18 Press the Enter key to select the Install all PRISM de...

Page 578: ...he Enter key The PC returns a total bytes memory value and a bytes free value The bytes free value must be greater than 20 MB to run an FCP conversion If the bytes free value is less than 20 MB delete files from the hard drive C to make enough free bytes available 2 When the PC bytes free value is at least 20 MB insert the FCP conversion tool 1 01A diskette into diskette drive a or drive b 3 At th...

Page 579: ...e diskette for a software or phrase diskette group The procedure for loading either software or phrases from diskettes onto the PC hard drive is identical However each group is loaded independently Perform the following steps to load software and phrase diskettes 1 At the DOS C prompt type fcpconv and press the Enter key The Main Menu appears as shown in Figure 14 4 Main Menu V1 01A 1 UPG Utility ...

Page 580: ...o accept the default or type B if appropriate then press the Enter key A screen similar to Figure 14 7 appears Insert Diskette 1 into drive A Press Enter when ready Figure 14 7 Screen for Beginning Load Add of New Software or Phrase Diskettes onto PC Hard Drive 5 Insert software diskette 1 MS301XXX SSU into the designated diskette drive and press the Enter key The UPG Information screen appears Fi...

Page 581: ... key and the Main Menu Figure 14 4 reappears 9 Remove the last software diskette from the PC diskette drive 10 Repeat steps 2 through 9 to load the phrase diskettes 9033XXXX SPU If there are multiple languages on the XC1000 add each set of phrase diskettes independently 11 After all software and phrases have been loaded select option 1 UPG Utility from the Main Menu Figure 14 4 The UPG Utility men...

Page 582: ... 14 10 Example of the Select UPG Utility Menu Display UPG Information UPG Number MS301XXX SSU System Type XC1000 XC1000 Target Software Release 3 02 Supported Software Release s 1 5 1 5 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 3 00 Language type target ver Supported version s American Eng Mar 903351 Canadian French 973350 American Spanish 993350 Press Esc to return Figure 14 11 Display UPG Information Screen 14 8 CONNECT ...

Page 583: ...00 into the PC COM ports 7 Make sure that the cabling connections are correct Figure 14 12 is a representation of the hardware configuration for connecting the PC to the XC1000 COM2 SMT PORT COM1 B C B C J43 J44 J45 A A XC1000 BACK J46 J47 J48 J49 J50 NULL MODEM A 25 PIN MALE B 25 PIN FEMALE C 9 PIN FEMALE J43 CABLE P N 057 1174 000 PLUGS INTO PC COM2 PORT 9 PIN MALE J50 CABLE P N 057 1174 000 PLU...

Page 584: ... to return to the FCP conversion Main Menu Figure 14 4 2 Using the down arrow key select option 2 Perform Continue Conver sion and press the Enter key The Select UPG screen appears similar to the screen shown in Figure 14 13 Only software diskette name s previously loaded onto the hard drive are displayed Phrase diskette names are listed only from the Display menu Main Menu V1 01A 1 UPG Utility 2 ...

Page 585: ...fault is 9600 Then press the Enter key to accept and skip to the next field c In the SMT Password field type the SMT password then press the Enter key to accept and skip to the next field Note that the cursor will not be flashing and the SMT Password entry is hidden d In the Download Port Baud Rate field select 1200 9600 or 19200 The default is 19200 which is the recommended rate The FCP conversio...

Page 586: ...11 If Figure 14 16 reappears press the Esc key to terminate the FCP conversion and return to the DOS C FCP prompt If the hardware cabling between the PC and the XC1000 was not done properly perform the following steps a Repeat the steps listed in section 14 8 b At the C FCP prompt type fcpconv and press the Enter key c At the FCP conversion Main Menu Figure 14 4 select option 2 Perform Continue Co...

Page 587: ...Perform Continue Conversion and press the Enter key When the screen displays Stopped at stage 10 Continue the Conversion Y N Y press the Enter key to continue g Continue the conversion from step 6 in section 14 9 11 The automatic script runs for a short time less than 5 minutes the script verifies that the engineering bit is set and that system drive 1 is larger than or equal to system drive 0 Als...

Page 588: ...again section 14 9 step 1 After all checks have been completed a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 14 17 appears Final confirmation before conversion VPM serial 12345 will be converted to Software release 3 02 Continue the conversion Y N Y Press Enter to continue Press Esc to quit Figure 14 17 Example of Final Confirmation Before Conversion Screen 12 If the information in the Final confirm...

Page 589: ...TION When the checks are completed press F12 to quit SMT emulation and continue the conversion Press Enter to start SMT emulation Figure 14 19 Instruction Screen for Reminding User To Press the F12 Key To Continue FCP Conversion b Press the Enter key again A few screens flash and then the SMT Main Menu appears on the PC screen c If the XC1000 has not yet been taken out of service by disabling all ...

Page 590: ...ABOVE E MESSAGES F ADD SECTOR TO BAD WRITE TABLE G CLEAR BAD WRITE TABLE H RESET THE CDR POINTERS I DISK UTILITY J PHRASE RECORD UTILITY K REPLACE DRIVE U UPGRADE SYSTEM DRIVE V VERIFY DRIVE FOR INTEGRITY X EXIT SELECT COPY OPTION Figure 14 21 COPY OPTIONS Menu for Releases 1 5X and 2 X 17 Verify phrases on the system drive 0 as follows a Type V to select option V VERIFY DRIVE FOR INTEGRITY then p...

Page 591: ...ediately Do not attempt to correct the problem s yourself Caution 18 At the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt turn off the power to the XC1000 19 Create a backup of system drive 0 by performing the following steps a Place the backup drive in system drive slot 2 b Turn on the power to the XC1000 c At the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt press DC and the COPY OPTIONS menu appears Figure 14 21 d Type D to select op...

Page 592: ... a special IPL download The XC1000 then reads modifies and stores download port information For the conversion the voice processing module download port is temporarily assigned a baud rate of 19200 Software files cbbase abs ipl2 abs os abs are downloaded to the XC1000 While these events are occurring different status lines are displayed at the bottom of the screen and the PC beeps from time to tim...

Page 593: ...are or firmware making sure that all cards are reinserted firmly into the XC1000 26 Turn on the power to the XC1000 The FCP conversion script auto matically runs again The file cards are upgraded with the new file card EPROMs Many screens scroll including screens that appear to be errors however these are normal intermittent steps of the FCP conversion For example the XC1000 reports the prompt tab...

Page 594: ... need to verify the VPM 1 Verify drives for integrity menu 20 1 3 2 Check user records vs AMT menu 20 3 reformat 10 3 Check AMT vs IRN menu 20 3 reformat 11 Press Enter now INSTRUCTION Figure 14 23 Instruction Screen for Verifying Drives and Running Reformat Options 10 and 11 28 Press the Enter key and the Menu 20 Service Operations Main Menu appears as shown in Figure 14 24 Menu 20 Service Operat...

Page 595: ...ey and the Drive Verify Utilities menu reappears 31 Repeat step 30 to verify system drive 1 Enter S1 at the prompt If any errors result from the drive verifications correct the errors before continuing the conversion Call the Octel National Response Center for national accounts or the Octel Technical Assistance Center TAC immediately Do not attempt to correct the problem s yourself Caution 32 Afte...

Page 596: ...MT then press the Enter key Perform the following steps a At the ENTER Y TO CONFIRM UR AMT CROSS CHECK prompt type Y and press the Enter key to continue b When CHECK DONE PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE appears press the Enter key The prompt reappears on the screen c At the prompt type reformat and press the Enter key The PC beeps a few times and a screen similar to Figure 14 26 reappears 36 Type 11 to ...

Page 597: ...4 Press Enter to boot the VPM and start SMT emulation INSTRUCTION Figure 14 28 Instruction Screen for the Final FCP Conversion 39 At the instruction screen Figure 14 28 press the Enter key and the XC1000 automatically reboots At the blank screen press the Enter key again and the Please Enter System Manager Password prompt appears 40 Enter the System Manager Password then press the Enter key The SM...

Page 598: ...saver program is activated during the conversion press only the Shift key to redisplay the screen If any stage in the conversion fails attempt to continue with the conversion by selecting the Perform Continue Conversion option from the FCP Conversion Main Menu A message containing the number of the stage that failed and a prompt asking whether to continue appears Always respond to the prompt by ty...

Page 599: ...rt is set up and connected incorrectly a message indicating the failure appears Check the connections between the PC and the voice processor by performing the following steps 1 Disconnect the SMT cable P N 057 1270 000 from the SMT port normally the third port form the left on the scanner card 2 Disconnect the cable from the first port on the scanner card and plug it into the SMT port 3 From the F...

Page 600: ...m boots the voice processor and accesses the menu 20 utilities in the offline mode If the voice processor does not have enough CPU memory the voice processor dumps and displays the CPU Diagnostics menu Verify that the amount of CPU memory is correct If necessary turn off the voice processor and add CPU memory After adding memory turn on the voice processor and select the Perform Continue Conversio...

Page 601: ...ls system drive one During this installation process CB errors might indicate that a bad track has been encountered With Release 3 X bad tracks can be added to a drive that is not installed Use the procedure in section 11 to add the bad track to the bad track table Follow the appropriate steps depending on whether the error was encountered during a message or phrase copy Stage 111 This stage does ...

Page 602: ...EX prompt type the cylinder number and press the Enter key 13 When the ENTER DISK HEAD NUMBER HEX prompt appears type the head number and press the Enter key 14 When the ENTER DISK SECTOR NUMBER HEX prompt appears type the sector number and press the Enter key 15 At the ADD CYLINDER X HEAD X SECTOR X TO DRIVE N BAD SECTOR TABLE CONTINUE Y N prompt type Y if the information displayed is correct Typ...

Page 603: ...15 RELEASE 3 02 ONLINE UPGRADE INSTRUCTIONS ...

Page 604: ...XC1000 15 5 15 8 INSTALL ONLINE UPGRADE TOOL 1 00 ON THE PC HARD DRIVE 15 6 15 9 VERIFY THE SETUP IN THE SETUP MENU 15 8 15 10 LOAD SOFTWARE AND PHRASE DISKETTES ON THE PC HARD DRIVE 15 9 15 11 BEGIN THE AUTOMATIC UPGRADE 15 13 15 12 RECONNECT THE SMT AND VERIFY THE UPGRADE 15 17 15 13 RESET THE BOOT AREA 15 17 15 14 DISABLE THE ENGINEERING BIT 15 18 15 15 MAKE SOFTWARE AND PHRASE AREAS REDUNDANT ...

Page 605: ...Upgrade from Hard Drive 15 22 15 16 9 Display Upgrade Log File 15 22 15 16 10 Log File F1 While Displaying Upgrade Log File 15 22 15 16 11 Select UPG Directory Copy Delete UPG Menu 15 23 15 16 12 Load UPG to Hard Drive 15 23 15 16 13 Copy UPG to Diskettes 15 23 15 16 14 Delete UPG from Hard Drive 15 24 15 16 15 Change Default Directory 15 24 Section Page ...

Page 606: ...Copy Delete UPG Menu 15 10 Figure 15 9 Screen Prompts for Beginning the File Copy 15 11 Figure 15 10 Verification Message 15 11 Figure 15 11 Example of Status Messages Screen 15 12 Figure 15 12 Status Messages Screen With File Copy Complete Message 15 12 Figure 15 13 UPG Directories Menu 15 14 Figure 15 14 Status Messages Box With Confirmation Prompt 15 14 Figure 15 15 Status Messages Box With Beg...

Page 607: ...nd phrases Equipment required to perform an online upgrade is listed in section 15 3 The following prerequisites must be considered before beginning an online upgrade The XC1000 must function correctly at Release 3 0 Resolve any errors entered in the status log System drive 0 area A must be redundant with system drive 1area A and system drive 0 area B must be redundant with system drive 1 area B W...

Page 608: ...rminal and verify the upgrade section 15 12 30 Reset the boot area to run the XC1000 on new software section 15 13 31 Disable the engineering bit section 15 14 32 Make software and phrase areas redundant section 15 15 If the online upgrade fails at any point during the proce dure call the Octel National Response Center for national accounts or the Octel Technical Assistance Center TAC for assistan...

Page 609: ...ion 9312 or higher If standby redundant XC1000 two cards and two sets of EPROMs are required Two F10 file cards P N 044 2005 XXX with two sets of the following EPROMs Low byte P N 039 1274 003 revision 9306 or higher High byte P N 039 1275 003 revision 9306 or higher or two F20 file cards P N 044 2054 XXX with two sets of the following EPROMs Low byte P N 039 1400 003 revision 9314 or higher High ...

Page 610: ...ecessary for example 9033XXXX SPU P N 316 XXXX XXX Specific part numbers for phrase diskettes are determined at the time of a new phrase s release DOS 5 0 or higher 15 4 ENABLE THE ENGINEERING BIT Perform the following steps to enable the engineering bit 1 Call the Octel National Response Center for national accounts or the Octel Technical Assistance Center to have the engineering bit turned on Be...

Page 611: ...y 4 The current System Boot Area and Drive Next Boot Area fields are displayed showing software versions of the current System Boot Area field 5 Verify that the current System Boot Area and Drive Next Boot Area fields are redundant by performing the following procedure If the boot areas are the same press C three times to return to the SMT Main Menu without changing anything If the boot areas are ...

Page 612: ...D USE A FEMLE FEMALE DB25 DB25 GENDER CHANGER ADAPTER P N 003 1092 000 Figure 15 29 Representation of PC to XC1000 Connection 15 8 INSTALL ONLINE UPGRADE TOOL 1 00 ON THE PC HARD DRIVE If an online upgrade was previously done on the same PC skip to section 15 9 To install the online upgrade tool 1 00 perform the following steps 1 Make sure that DOS 5 0 or higher is already installed on the PC hard...

Page 613: ...y reading drive A Abort Retry Fail message appears Insert the diskette into drive A type A for Abort and repeat step 6 8 At the A prompt type INSTALL C then press the Enter key to specify the destination hard drive for the online upgrade tool 1 00 software The PC Online Upgrade Installation screen appears as shown in Figure 15 30 Octel Communications Corporation PC Online Upgrade Installation The ...

Page 614: ...GRD NDX 1 file s copied COPY PCUPGRD BAT C PCUPGRD BAT 1 file s copied End Of PC Online Upgrade Installation About to run PCUPGRD Press any key to continue Figure 15 32 Screen Showing Software Files Copied Onto the PC Hard Drive Escape F2 Help F1 This Option Begins The Upgrade Procedure Online Upgrade Main Menu Begin Automatic Upgrade Utilities Menu Setup Menu Online Upgrade 1 00 Copyright c 1993 ...

Page 615: ...e diskettes to upgrade from one release version to another For most 3 0 to 3 02 online upgrades only software diskettes are needed because phrases remain unchanged If phrases change however phrase diskettes are also needed Verify what software and phrase diskettes are required by calling the Octel National Response Center for national accounts or the Octel Technical Assistance Center Software disk...

Page 616: ...lect the Copy or Delete UPG option then press the Enter key The Copy Delete UPG Menu appears as shown in Figure 15 36 Escape F2 Help F1 Online Upgrade Main Menu Begin Automatic Upgrade Utilities Menu Setup Menu Online Upgrade 1 00 Copyright c 1993 Octel Communications Corporation This Option Selects The UPG Directory For Subsequent Operations Utilities Menu Select UPG Directory Read Upgrade Inform...

Page 617: ...ar to the one shown in Figure 15 38 appears Escape F2 Online Upgrade Main Menu Begin Automatic Upgrade Utilities Menu Setup Menu Online Upgrade 1 00 Copyright c 1993 Octel Communications Corporation Utilities Menu Select UPG Directory Read Upgrade Information Copy or Delete UPG Verify Upgrade Files Begin Upgrade from Hard Drive Display Upgrade Log File Copy Delete UPG Menu Select UPG Directory Loa...

Page 618: ...e F2 Online Upgrade 1 00 Copyright c 1993 Octel Communications Corporation Status Messages Verifying File C PCUPG MS300XXX SSU PRCE TBL Verifying File C PCUPG MS300XXX SSU IRCE TBL Verifying File C PCUPG MS300XXX SSU PRCF TBL Verifying File C PCUPG MS300XXX SSU IRCF TBL Verifying File C PCUPG MS300XXX SSU PRSP TBL Verifying File C PCUPG MS300XXX SSU IRSP TBL Verifying File C PCUPG MS300XXX SSU PRA...

Page 619: ...eginning Caution Phrase upgrades are necessary only when phrases have changed between software levels If phrases have changed between software levels within a particular language or multiple languages a separate phrase upgrade for each changed language must be performed Perform phrase upgrades before upgrading software 1 At the Online Upgrade Main Menu use the up arrow key to select the Begin Auto...

Page 620: ...d the existing log file continues and is appended with new log file information The log file can be viewed from the Display Upgrade Log File option of the Utilities Menu 4 At the Enter System Manager Password prompt enter the system manager password then press the Enter key Status Messages scroll until a screen similar to Figure 15 42 appears Escape F2 Online Upgrade 1 00 Copyright c 1993 Octel Co...

Page 621: ...N Y Status Aspen Ready to Upgrade Version Information OK Figure 15 43 Status Messages Box With Begin Automatic Upgrade Prompt 6 If all of the displayed information is correct at the Begin Upgrade of UPG Software Language Data Y N Y prompt press the Enter key to accept the default Y The Online Upgrade Status screen appears Figure 15 44 is an example of the Online Upgrade Status screen showing an in...

Page 622: ...10240 File IPL3 ABS Files Remaining 021 Status Upgrade in Progress Escape F2 Figure 15 44 Example of Online Upgrade Status Screen Showing In Progress Upgrade Escape F2 Sync char 43 Packet Response 6 Successfully transmitted packet 1 VPM EOT Response 6 VPM Command Response 0 Online Upgrade 1 00 Copyright c 1993 Octel Communications Corporation Status Messages Online Upgrade Status Upgrade UPG MS300...

Page 623: ... to display drive information about system drive 0 6 The Drive Serial No is displayed At the Is this the correct drive y n prompt verify that the drive serial number is correct then type y and press the Enter key Drive information is displayed showing the current software version in the System Boot Area field and the new software version in the area not currently booted 7 Press C and repeat steps ...

Page 624: ...lease 3 0 introduced multiple software areas to the XC1000 to allow an upgrade to be performed online and to allow software Release 3 02 to be run on a trial basis with the option of returning to the previous release The XC1000 should now be running at software Release 3 02 with Release 3 0 in the nonboot area Octel recommends that the XC1000 be run by alternating software in areas A and B for app...

Page 625: ...ea A y n prompt type y and then press the Enter key to make the phrase areas redundant 11 At the Phrase areas now redundant Press any key to continue prompt press C three times to return to the SMT Main Menu 12 Call the Octel National Response Center for national accounts or the Octel Technical Assistance Center to have the engineering bit turned off 15 16 REFERENCE THE ONLINE UPGRADE HELP INFORMA...

Page 626: ... prompts the user with verification of the selected UPG Directory to run the Online Upgrade i e Upgrade UPG ______ From Drive C Y N Press Y to continue The next screen will again verify the selected UPG Directory for the Online Upgrade but this time with more specifics regarding release versions languages etc Press Y to continue The Online Upgrade will then run automatically from start to finish u...

Page 627: ...ons to be performed within the Copy Delete UPG Menu 15 16 5 Read Upgrade Information This option allows the user to display more detailed information regarding the contents of a selected UPG Directory created from software or phrase diskettes on the hard drive as specified in the Setup Menu Upon first selecting this option the user is prompted to select a UPG Directory or if the Select UPG Directo...

Page 628: ...rade immediately following the Load UPG to Hard Drive option or Select UPG Directory option if desired This option is essentially the same as the Begin Automatic Upgrade option except that it does not offer the FLOPPY option Upon selecting this option the online upgrade will run automatically from start to finish unless errors are incurred If errors are incurred call your Octel Service Representat...

Page 629: ...tte to be sequentially loaded Upon loading all diskettes or File Copy completion the user is prompted to Press Enter To Continue 15 16 13 Copy UPG to Diskettes This option allows the user to copy UPG files from software or phrase diskettes from the hard drive to floppy diskettes hard and floppy drives as specified in the Setup Menu Upon first selecting this option the user is prompted to select a ...

Page 630: ...er at this prompt the selected UPG Directory WILL NOT be deleted from the hard drive If the user instead inputs Y the selected UPG Directory will be deleted from the hard drive Upon File Delete completion the user is prompted to Press Enter To Continue 15 16 15 Change Default Directory This option allows the user to change the default directory where the UPG Directories are stored on the hard driv...

Page 631: ...16 RELEASE 3 0 SYSTEM UTILITIES ...

Page 632: ...s Redundant 16 12 16 3 6 4 Make Area A or B Redundant 16 13 16 3 6 5 Make Both Areas Redundant 16 14 16 3 7 Display Drive Info 16 16 16 4 DRIVE REPLACEMENT UTILITIES 16 17 16 4 1 Replace System Drive 16 17 16 4 1 1 Take the XC1000 Out of Service 16 17 16 4 1 2 Copy System Data to the Replacement Drive 16 17 16 4 1 3 Test the New Drive 16 18 16 4 2 Replace Message Drives 16 19 16 4 2 1 Take the XC1...

Page 633: ... 16 31 16 6 7 Reset CDR Pointers 16 32 16 6 8 Initialize System 16 33 16 7 DRIVE VERIFY UTILITIES 16 33 16 8 DATAFILE UTILITIES 16 34 16 8 1 Read Datafile Record 16 35 16 8 2 Display Record 16 36 16 8 3 Expand Datafile Size 16 37 16 8 4 Decrease Datafile Size 16 39 16 8 5 Get Physical Address 16 40 16 8 6 Get Logical Address 16 41 16 9 MESSAGE UTILITIES 16 42 16 9 1 Display Message Blocks 16 42 16...

Page 634: ...16 6 Figure 16 5 Example of Prompts and Responses for the Copy Software Utility 16 7 Figure 16 6 Example of Prompts and Responses for the Copy System Data Tables Utility 16 8 Figure 16 7 Redundancy Utilities Menu 16 10 Figure 16 8 Representation of Using the Make Software Areas A and B Redundant Utility 16 10 Figure 16 9 Example of Prompts and Responses for the Make Software Areas Redundant Utilit...

Page 635: ... 19 Example of Prompts and Responses for the Install Replacement Drive Utility 16 21 Figure 16 20 Drive Install Utilities Menu 16 22 Figure 16 21 Example of Prompts and Responses for the Install Drive Utility 16 23 Figure 16 22 Prompts and Responses for the Drive De Install Utility 16 24 Figure 16 23 Example of Prompts and Responses for the Initialize System Utility 16 25 Figure 16 24 Miscellaneou...

Page 636: ...r the Expand Datafile Size Utility 16 39 Figure 16 37 Decrease Datafile Size Menu 16 40 Figure 16 38 Example of Prompts and Responses for the Decrease Datafile Size Utility 16 40 Figure 16 39 Example of Physical Address 16 41 Figure 16 40 Example of the Prompts and Responses for the Get Logical Address Utility 16 42 Figure 16 41 Message Utilities Menu 16 42 Figure 16 42 Example of Prompts and Resp...

Page 637: ...OMMAND prompt with Release 3 0 software DI accesses the install options menu DR accesses the terminal type options menu DT accesses the drive tests menu The reformat menu can still be accessed from the service prompt reached from the SMT Main Menu In software Release 3 0 service operations utilities are accessed through Menu 20 Service Operations on the system manager terminal SMT They are accesse...

Page 638: ...operations utilities that are available with the service option enabled These utilities can be performed in either the offline or online modes Utilities that are available only in the offline mode are indicated Utilities that are available in both the offline and online modes are not displayed on the menus in the same sequences Therefore always read and follow the screen prompts Caution Utilities ...

Page 639: ...erefore new utilities are available to read messages 16 3 DRIVE COPY UTILITIES Use the Drive Copy utilities menu to select utilities for initializing drives creating drive backups copying software phrases and system data tables making drives redundant and displaying drive information Figure 16 2 shows the Drive Copy Utilities menu Menu 20 Service Operations VP Name Drive Copy Utilities 1 Initializ...

Page 640: ...al number shown for the drive is correct 19 If initializing a system drive at the Enter the number of user records default XXXX prompt press the Return key to retain the default setting or enter the desired number of user records 20 If initializing a system drive at the Enter the number of CDR blocks default XXXX prompt press the Return key to retain the default setting or enter the desired number...

Page 641: ... S3 can be selected only drives S0 and S1 are valid entries If S2 or S3 is entered CB errors can occur or an invalid drive message is displayed Caution 5 At the Enter position of source drive S0 S3 prompt enter the number of the drive S0 or S1 to be copied 6 At the Is this the correct drive y n prompt enter Y if the serial number shown for the source drive is correct 7 At the Enter position of des...

Page 642: ...Software utility to copy software from a selected area A or B on a source system drive to a selected area A or B on a destination system drive The parameters record of the destination drive is updated with the new software information for the destination area If the XC1000 is on line when using this utility the software boot area cannot be specified as the destination Using this utility to copy so...

Page 643: ...rce drive area to the destination drive area 9 When the initialization is complete press any key to return to the Drive Copy Utilities menu 10 Type C to return to menu 20 Figure 16 5 is an example of a completed screen for this utility Enter position of source drive S0 S3 S0 Drive Serial No O100012 Is this the correct drive y n y System Boot Area A Drive Next Boot Area A Software Versions Area A A...

Page 644: ...onfirming that the drive is correct the XC1000 copies system data tables from the specified source drive to the specified destination drive 9 When the initialization is complete press any key to return to the Drive Copy Utilities menu 10 Type C to return to menu 20 If CB messages pertaining to the system data tables are encountered do not proceed with the copy procedure Contact the Octel National ...

Page 645: ...he serial number shown for the destination drive is correct The XC1000 copies the messages from the source drive to the destination drive 7 When the initialization is complete press any key to return to the Drive Copy Utilities menu 8 Type C to return to menu 20 If CB messages pertaining to the messages are encoun tered do not proceed with the copy procedure Contact the Octel National Response Cen...

Page 646: ... Software Copy Copy Figure 16 8 Representation of Using the Make Software Areas A and B Redundant Utility To make software areas A and B redundant perform the following steps 1 From the Redundancy Utilities menu type the corresponding menu item number at the Enter Choice prompt to access the Make Software Areas A and B Redundant utility 2 If the utility is being performed in the online mode procee...

Page 647: ...on of using this utility to make area B on both system drives a redundant copy of area A Area A Area B System Disk 0 Area A Area B System Disk 1 Phrases Phrases Phrases Phrases Copy Copy Figure 16 10 Example of Make Phrase Areas A and B Redundant Utility When this utility is run in the offline mode the XC1000 prompts for the source area when this utility is run in the online mode the XC1000 assume...

Page 648: ...tafile subtype 01 area A language 1 record 000000010002 reading Phrase datafile subtype 02 area A language 1 record 0000 Checking phrases on drive 0 processing msgid 00000017 processing msgid 00004017 processing msgid 00000027 Making phrases redundant on drive 0 Copying Phrases to language 1 area B Copying to redundant area Copying Phrases to language 2 area B Copying to redundant area Copying Phr...

Page 649: ...rea A or B Redundant Utility To make area A or B redundant perform the following steps 1 From the Make System Drives Redundant menu Figure 16 12 select Make Area A or B Redundant Although drives S0 through S3 can be selected only drives S0 and S1 are valid entries If S2 or S3 is entered CB errors can occur or an invalid drive message is displayed Caution 2 At the Enter position of Source Drive S0 ...

Page 650: ...een for the Make Area A or B Redundant utility Make System Area A or B Redundant Enter position of Source Drive S0 S3 S0 Drive Serial No C561350 Is this the correct drive y n y System Boot Area A Drive Next Boot Area A Software Versions Area A Area B 3 00S1 3 00X Phrases Versions Area A Area B 1 AE 32 51 1 AE 33 51 2 Invalid 2 Invalid 3 Invalid 3 Invalid 4 Invalid 4 Invalid 5 Invalid 5 Invalid Las...

Page 651: ... software and phrases will be copied 3 At the Is this the correct drive y n prompt enter Y if the serial number shown for the drive is correct 4 When the Make drive destination a redundant copy of drive source y n prompt appears enter Y to confirm the copy or N to cancel the copy If the phrases are already redundant the Phrases already redun dant message appears At the Do you wish to recopy y n pr...

Page 652: ...item number at the Enter Choice prompt to access the Display Drive Info utility 3 At the Enter position of source drive S0 S3 prompt enter the number of the drive for which information is to be displayed 4 At the Is this the correct drive y n prompt enter Y if the serial number of the drive is correct 5 When the initialization is complete press any key to return to the Drive Copy Utilities menu 6 ...

Page 653: ...g system software phrases and a site specific database Both drives also contain bad sector tables and the serial numbers of all system drives When a system drive is replaced all data must be copied to the replacement drive This procedure requires that the XC1000 be out of service for about 2 hours 16 4 1 1 Take the XC1000 Out of Service Perform the following steps to take the XC1000 out of service...

Page 654: ... the new system drive 1 At the ENTER BOOT COMMAND prompt type DT to access the drive test utility Respond to each prompt and the next prompt appears on the screen Answer the prompts as follows DRIVE TEST ENTER TYPE S M OR L L SINGLE OR CONTINUOUS S OR C S NOTE DRIVE NUMBERS SHOULD BE SEPARATED BY COMMA OR HYPHEN 2 At the SELECT DRIVE LIST 0 3 OR M0 M6 prompt enter the number of the drive to be tes...

Page 655: ...he replacement drive 1 Clearly label the message drive that will be replaced Do not use a permanent marker of any kind to label a drive 2 Clearly label the replacement message drive Do not use a perma nent marker of any kind to label a drive 3 Insert the replacement drive in system drive slot 3 or any open message drive slot M0 through M6 4 Turn on the power to the XC1000 At the ENTER BOOT COMMAND...

Page 656: ...n 16 4 3 6 Run garbage collect refer to section 16 6 2 7 Run the drive test refer to section 9 6 1 16 4 2 4 Returning the XC1000 to Normal Operation Complete the following steps to return the XC1000 to normal operation 1 Return the pilot number to the hunt group 2 Return the XC1000 to service 3 Send all removed drives and other material to Octel Communications Corporation immediately Refer to Appe...

Page 657: ...urn to the Drive Replacement Utilities menu 6 Type C to return to menu 20 Figure 16 19 is an example of a completed screen for the Install Replace ment Drive utility Install Replacement Drive Utility Enter drive to be installed S0 S3 M0 M6 S0 Drive Serial No M002042 Is this the correct drive y n y Install replacement System drive 0 y n y Installing messages Processing AMIS Directory records Proces...

Page 658: ...the corresponding menu item number at the Enter Choice prompt to select the Drive Install Utilities menu 6 From the Drive Install Utilities menu type the corresponding menu item number at the Enter Choice prompt to select the Install Drive utility option Although drives S0 through S3 can be selected only drives S0 and S1 are valid entries If S2 or S3 is entered CB errors can occur or an invalid dr...

Page 659: ...lot 1 as a System drive Verifying files on drive 0 Verifying Software files Copying Phrases to language 1 area A Copying to redundant area Copying Phrases to language 2 area A Copying Phrases to language 3 area A Copying Phrases to language 4 area A Copying Phrases to language 5 area A Copying Software Area A C O P Y I N G Copying Software Area B C O P Y I N G Copying Datafiles C O P Y I N G Insta...

Page 660: ...N if the incorrect drive is displayed If Y is entered the XC1000 proceeds to deinstall the drive 4 When the initialization is complete press any key to return to the Drive Install Utilities menu 5 Type C to return to menu 20 Figure 16 22 is an example of a completed screen for this utility De Install Drive Utility Enter drive to de install S0 S3 M0 M6 S1 De install System drive 1 y n y De installi...

Page 661: ...nues with the initialization 6 When the initialization is complete press any key to exit the utility The XC1000 reboots automatically Figure 16 23 is an example of a completed screen for this utility Initialize System You will destroy existing database Do you wish to continue y n y Enter number of user records default 1000 100 Enter number of CDR blocks default 7020 About to initialize system Do y...

Page 662: ...llect whenever message drives are replaced Using this utility is optional for system drives although Octel recommends it Do not run garbage collect with the master drive installed If garbage collect is run with the master drive in system slot 0 S0 all messages will be lost Caution The Garbage Collect utility is a two pass function During the first pass the XC1000 checks each user record in the sys...

Page 663: ...collect S0 S3 M0 M6 S for all System drives M for Message drives or A for all drives 4 At the Do you want a long garbage collect y n prompt enter Y for a long garbage collect or N for a short garbage collect 5 After the first pass is complete scramble codes and I O errors are reported The results are reported on a screen similar to Figure 16 25 If any errors are detected during the first pass call...

Page 664: ...he Octel Technical Assistance Center before proceeding with the second pass If 50 or more bad messages are found the engineering bit must be turned on before updating the drives Contact the Octel National Response Center for national accounts or the Octel Technical Assistance Center immediately 6 When the Do you wish to update drive s y n prompt appears enter Y to change user records and update fr...

Page 665: ...r it has been loaded perform the following steps 1 Set the boot area to the area that contains the new software using the preceding steps 2 Restart the XC1000 To return to the previous software level perform the following steps 1 Set the boot area to the one that contains the previous software level using steps 1 through 4 of the Set System Boot Area utility 2 Restart the XC1000 Figure 16 27 is an...

Page 666: ...the Miscellaneous Utilities menu 8 Type C to return to menu 20 Figure 16 28 is an example of the Add Sector to Bad Sector Table screen Add Sector to Bad Sector Table Enter Drive Number S0 S3 M0 M6 s0 Drive Serial No M5999608 Is this the correct drive y n y Enter Cylinder Number HEX 400 Enter Head Number HEX 8 Enter Sector Number HEX 10 Sector added to Bad Sector Table Press any key to continue Fig...

Page 667: ...ilities menu 7 Type C to return to menu 20 16 6 6 Enable Disable Drive Read Only Mode Use the Enable Disable Drive Read Only Mode utility to control use of the read only mode If a message drive is malfunctioning use the read only mode until the drive can be replaced Messages can still be retrieved from the drive but new messages cannot be written to it Perform the following steps to enable or disa...

Page 668: ...ith the CDR buffer or when the CDR buffer has been expanded This utility causes the file card to write the next CDR data at the beginning of the CDR buffer erasing the current data This utility is available only in the offline mode Perform the following steps to reset the CDR pointers 1 Download that the current CDR buffer to a PC before continuing 2 From the SMT Main Menu shut down the XC1000 usi...

Page 669: ...s Menu Verification allows data records on a drive to be checked before a copy is performed or after an unsuccessful copy The service engineer might be able to repair the bad records and then perform a successful copy Three types of drive verification can be performed Software Verify This option verifies that all files on a system drive can be read Phrase Verify This option verifies that all phras...

Page 670: ...s type the corresponding menu item number at the Enter Choice prompt on menu 20 The Datafile Utilities menu appears as shown in Figure 16 31 Datafile Utilities 1 Read Datafile Record 2 Display Record 3 Expand Datafile Size 4 Decrease Datafile Size 5 Get Physical Address 6 Get Logical Address Enter Choice Figure 16 31 Datafile Utilities Menu One of the most significant changes in Release 3 0 is the...

Page 671: ...rd Error Log 83 386 Nework Error Log Table 16 2 Record Number Conversions for Releases Preceding Release 3 0 Record Number of Releases Before Release 3 0 Datafile Type Datafile Subtype 0 2 System 4 User Records 4 2 System 0 System Status Table 29 3 Utility 2 File Card Configuration 2D 3 Utility 0 Dump Records 2F 3 Utility 82 File Card Error Log 30 3 Utility 3 Disk Info File 31 3 Utility 80 386 RAT...

Page 672: ...e 16 33 Example of Screen Showing Available Datafile Subtypes for Datafile Type 3 4 At the Select Datafile Subtype prompt enter the number of the subtype from which to read the record 5 At the Enter record number hex prompt enter the number of the record in hexadecimal from which to begin reading the datafile If the record number is beyond the range for the datafile the XC1000 displays a message i...

Page 673: ... the number of user records or CDR blocks The XC1000 displays the original file size the new file size and the space available Depending on the amount of data stored on the disk the available size varies For example if software phrases and database informa tion have filled the disk no space is available for expansion In this case the expansion utility cannot be run This utility is available only i...

Page 674: ...es The Expand Datafile Size menu reappears 7 To expand another datafile repeat steps 3 and 4 To proceed with the expansion press the Return key at the Select Datafile Subtype prompt 8 At the Apply all filesize changes y n prompt enter Y to proceed with the expansion or N to cancel the expansion 9 If the CDR buffer is being expanded the You will lose all your CDR Do you want to continue prompt appe...

Page 675: ...DR buffer Caution Use the Decrease Datafile Size utility to decrease the size of the CDR buffer The number of user records cannot be decreased Before running this utility download any data from the CDR buffer to a PC because running this utility erases the data in the CDR buffer This utility is available only in the offline mode To decrease the size of a datafile perform the following steps 1 From...

Page 676: ...ocks Select Datafile Subtype You will lose all your CDR Do you wish to continue y n y Apply all filesize changes y n y Decrease Datafile Size complete Press any key to continue Figure 16 38 Example of Prompts and Responses for the Decrease Datafile Size Utility 9 When the decrease of the datafile size is complete press any key to return to the Datafile Utilities menu 16 8 5 Get Physical Address Us...

Page 677: ...ddress 6 When the physical address display is complete press any key to return to the Datafile Utilities menu 16 8 6 Get Logical Address Use the Get Logical Address utility to display the logical address of a chosen datafile The utility requires the drive cylinder and head numbers and displays the datafile type subtype and record numbers To display the logical address perform the following steps 1...

Page 678: ...rompt on menu 20 to access the Message Utilities menu Figure 16 41 shows the Message Utilities menu Message Utilities 1 Display Message Blocks 2 Display Phrase Blocks 3 Message Id to Physical Address Enter Choice Figure 16 41 Message Utilities Menu 16 9 1 Display Message Blocks Use the Display Message Blocks utility to display the contents of a selected message as follows 1 From the Message Utilit...

Page 679: ...se Blocks utility 2 At the Enter Position of Source drive S0 S3 prompt enter the number of the drive on which the selected phrase resides 3 At the Enter Message Id Hex prompt enter the number in hexadecimal of the message ID for the phrase 4 At the Enter start address 0 4FFF hex prompt enter the address in hexadecimal from which to begin displaying the selected phrase The XC1000 displays the selec...

Page 680: ... completed screen for this utility Enter Message Id Hex c243 Enter Scramble Code Hex c668 Physical Address is Drive 3 Cylinder 0048 Sector 0036 Head 0006 Press any key to continue Figure 16 44 Example of Prompts and Responses for the Message Id to Physical Address Utility 16 10 SMT DEBUG UTILITY Use the SMT Debug utility as an alternative method for accessing the reformat menu This option is avail...

Page 681: ... 00000000 D 00040 9E014509 010000F0 53D75300 00000000 E S S 00050 01000900 07000000 A80E780E 34003400 x 4 4 00060 D1121F00 Press P to print status log C to clear log or any other key to return to option selection Figure 16 45 Example of the Display Status Log Utility 16 12 TOGGLE EXTENDED PRINT Use the Toggle Extended Print utility to toggle the display of details when certain utilities are run Ex...

Page 682: ...r online mode Menu 20 in the offline mode has the following utilities which are not available in the online mode Drive Copy Utilities Initialize Drive Create Backup Drive Copy System Data Tables Drive Replacement Utilities All Drive Install Utilities All Miscellaneous Utilities Initialize Drive Clear Bad Write Table Reset CDR Pointers Initialize System Datafile Utilities Expand Datafile Size Decre...

Page 683: ...17 RELEASE 4 X FCP CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS r P N 281 0023 002 1 of 3 ...

Page 684: ...nus 17 8 17 6 2 Running Validity Checks and Garbage Collect 17 9 17 7 LOAD MIRROR SOFTWARE FCP CONVERSION TOOL AND SOFTWARE AND PHRASE DISKETTES ON THE PC HARD DRIVE 17 11 17 7 1 Installing SoftKlone MIRROR III Software Version 2 5 17 11 17 7 2 Installing the FCP Conversion Tool 17 13 17 7 3 Loading Software and Phrases From Diskettes Onto the PC Hard Drive 17 14 17 8 CONNECT THE PC AND THE XC1000...

Page 685: ...t Diskettes Are Being Added to the Hard Drive 17 16 Figure 17 9 Screen Confirming That the UPG Diskette Loading Is Complete 17 17 Figure 17 10 Example of the Select UPG Utility Menu 17 17 Figure 17 11 Example of a Display UPG Information Screen 17 18 Figure 17 12 Representation of the PC to XC1000 Connection 17 19 Figure 17 13 Screen to Select Appropriate FCP Conversion Software From the Select UP...

Page 686: ...rd EPROMs 17 28 Figure 17 23 Instruction Screen for Verifying Drives and Running Reformat Options 10 and 11 17 30 Figure 17 24 Menu 20 Service Operations With a Warning To Press F12 To Continue Conversion 17 30 Figure 17 25 Menu 20 1 Drive Verify Utilities 17 31 Figure 17 26 Menu 20 Service Operations Within Verification 17 31 Figure 17 27 Reformat Menu for Release 4 X 17 32 Figure 17 28 Screen fo...

Page 687: ...re beginning an FCP conversion Do not attempt to perform an FCP conversion from software releases older than Release 1 55 or 2 X The FCP conversion will fail Caution If the XC1000 is currently at software older than Release 1 55 or 2 X upgrade the XC1000 to Release 1 55 or 2 X before beginning an FCP conversion Order the appropriate upgrade kit from Octel to upgrade the XC1000 to Release 1 55 or 2...

Page 688: ...ent software level Release 4 X does not support the Infotex application Do not perform an FCP conversion if the XC1000 has Infotex Caution Release 4 X does not support the InfoTex application If InfoTex is present disable the application If a TransAct version older than Release 2 0 is installed on the XC1000 a phrase limit of 1300 phrases still exists even though Release 4 X allows 2200 phrases Th...

Page 689: ...ction 17 10 9 Purge and convert follow me forward mailboxes section 17 11 17 3 MAKE SURE THAT THE CORRECT EQUIPMENT IS AVAILABLE The equipment and software that are required to perform the FCP conver sion from Release 1 55 or 2 X to Release 4 X are described in sections 17 3 1 and 17 3 2 Do not install new equipment at this time simply make sure that the equipment is already installed or that repl...

Page 690: ...py depending on the size of current system drives 380 MB Maxtor drive module P N 012 2007 000 or 760 MB Maxtor drive module P N 012 2022 002 The FCP conversion will fail if the XC1000 has software older than Release 1 55 or 2 X Caution An XC1000 currently running smoothly on Release 1 55 or 2 X software with one or more supported languages Marsha American English phrases must be at phrase level 90...

Page 691: ...for FaxAgentt UDLC12 31S Mod 10 P N 044 2058 XXX with the following EPROMs Low byte P N 039 1441 000 revision 9302 or higher High byte P N 039 1440 000 revision 9302 or higher V3 monitor card P N 044 2030 XXX with EPROMs 039 1380 003 revision 9307 or higher T1 TIC P N 044 2002 XXX with the following EPROMs Low byte P N 039 1289 000 revision 9000 or higher High byte P N 039 1290 000 revision 9000 o...

Page 692: ... pilot number of the hunt group assigned to the XC1000 Wait for confirmation that the engineering bit has been enabled 2 With the XC1000 on line and at the SMT Main Menu connect the printer to the back of the SMT connected to the XC1000 Turn on printer power 3 Select menu 4 and print all current port configurations To print select each menu and press Print Pg on a HP 700 43 terminal or the Shift a...

Page 693: ... Main Menu prompt type the date in mmdd format and press Return At the prompt type reformat and press Return Select option 0 to display the number of assigned user records 9 Add the number of assigned user records to the number obtained in step 7 For example if there are 1028 assigned user records add 1028 and 320 to determine how many user records are needed for the FCP conversion 1028 plus 320 e...

Page 694: ... The Special Request screen reappears 7 At Enter option type p for Print to print the Uninitialized Mailboxes report Review the Uninitialized Mailboxes report to determine which user records can be deleted to make more user records available for the FCP conversion After more user records are available recalculate the user record availability 17 6 PRINT RELEVANT MENUS AND RUN VALIDITY CHECKS AND GA...

Page 695: ...off message waiting indicator for special mailbox waiting 9 Download 10 Check user records vs AMT 11 Check AMT addresses vs internal record numbers 12 Patch up clobbered user records with bad lengths 13 Convert ICMB from COS to MB 14 Convert System Distribution Lists to Mailboxes Enter selection Figure 17 46 Reformat Menu for Release 1 55 IF YOU DON T KNOW WHAT YOU RE DOING PRESS BREAK NOW 0 Valid...

Page 696: ...prompt reappears on the screen c At the prompt type reformat and press Return The Reformat menu Figure 17 46 or Figure 17 47 appears again 5 Type 11 and press Return to select 11 Check AMT addresses vs internal record numbers a At ENTER Y TO CONFIRM AMT UR CROSS CHECK type y and press Return b When CHECK DONE PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE appears press Return The prompt reappears on the screen c At th...

Page 697: ...alled on the PC disable the software for the FCP conversion by modifying c autoexec bat on the PC For assistance refer to the software manual Do not run an FCP conversion on a laptop PC battery The PC must be plugged into an electrical wall outlet Other wise the conversion might fail due to loss of battery power Caution 5 If you are using a laptop PC for the upgrade make sure that the laptop PC is...

Page 698: ...nd press Enter Additional files are copied and the SESSION DATA COMPRESSION PROTOCOLS screen appears with a brief description of MIRROR protocols 12 Press Enter The second SESSION DATA COMPRESSION PROTOCOLS screen appears 13 Press Alt and S A TERMINAL EMULATIONS screen appears with a brief description of MIRROR emulation files 14 Press Enter The TERMINAL EMULATIONS List 1 of 3 screen appears 15 Pr...

Page 699: ... and press Enter The Dialing Directory screen appears 29 Press Esc A menu appears across the top of the screen 30 Type q to select the Quit option 31 Press Enter to select the Exit to DOS option The C MIRROR prompt is displayed The SoftKlone MIRROR III software version 2 5 installation is now complete 17 7 2 Installing the FCP Conversion Tool Install the FCP conversion tool onto the PC hard drive ...

Page 700: ...e and phrase diskettes to upgrade from one release level to another Software diskettes contain files for upgrading an XC1000 from one software release to another Phrase diskettes contain language data and phrases specific to a particular language If an XC1000 has multiple languages separate phrase diskettes are required for each language Software and phrase diskettes are labeled with the file name...

Page 701: ...e Conversion 3 SMT Emulation 4 Disaster Recovery 5 View log file 6 Exit UPG Utility 1 Display 2 Add 3 Delete Press Esc to return Figure 17 50 UPG Utility Screen 4 Using the down arrow key select option 2 Add and press Enter Pressing Esc returns the screen to the Main Menu The screen shown in Figure 17 51 appears Copy UPG from Diskettes or a Directory on PC hard drive Enter floppy drive designator ...

Page 702: ... N Y Press Enter to continue Press Esc to return Figure 17 53 Example of UPG Information Screen for Verifying That the Correct Diskettes Are Being Added to the Hard Drive 7 The default Y is highlighted Press Enter to accept the default and continue or type n and press Enter to return to the Main Menu Figure 17 49 If you select the default files are copied from the diskette to the PC hard drive Fil...

Page 703: ...rs Figure 17 50 13 From the UPG Utility menu select option 1 Display A Select UPG screen similar to the one shown in Figure 17 55 appears listing all software and phrase diskette names previously loaded onto the PC hard drive Main Menu V1 XXX 1 UPG Utility 2 Perform Continue Conversion 3 SMT Emulation 4 Disaster Recovery 5 View log file 6 Exit UPG Utility 1 Display 2 Add 3 Delete Press Esc to retu...

Page 704: ...to the XC1000 and connect them as follows 1 Make sure that the XC1000 is displaying the SMT Main Menu Disconnect the SMT cable P N 057 1174 000 from the back of the SMT Set aside the SMT 2 If the PC COM ports have 9 pin male connectors plug two female female DB25 DB9 gender changer adapters P N 003 1091 000 into the PC COM 1 and COM 2 ports If the PC COM ports have 25 pin male connectors plug two ...

Page 705: ...plays the C prompt type fcpconv and press Enter to display the FCP conversion Main Menu Figure 17 49 2 From the FCP conversion Main Menu make sure that the XC1000 was at the SMT Main Menu by selecting option 3 SMT Emulation This option enables the PC to act as an SMT 3 A screen appears for modifying the terminal emulation parameters Change the terminal emulation parameters as appropriate and press...

Page 706: ...nect or respond contact the Octel TAC for assistance g Press F12 to return to the FCP conversion Main Menu h Disconnect the cable from the SMT port J50 and plug it back into the J43 port as shown in Figure 17 57 i Plug the other cable that was disconnected in step a back into the SMT port J50 as shown in Figure 17 57 7 Use the down arrow key to select option 2 Perform Continue Conversion and press...

Page 707: ...on the screen Press the space bar to toggle among the field value options or press Enter to skip to the next field The field entries are as follows a In the SMT Type field select WY50 HP700 43 VT220 102 or ATT4425 5425 depending upon the SMT type Then press Enter to accept and skip to the next field b In the SMT Baud Rate field select 9600 or 1200 The default is 9600 Press Enter to accept and skip...

Page 708: ...igure 17 61 appears If the error screen does not appear proceed to step 14 If the error screen does appear press Enter If the error screen does not reappear proceed to step 14 If the error screen reappears press Esc to terminate the FCP conver sion and return to the DOS C FCP prompt SMT port is not connected password is not correct or the VPM is not on line Press Esc to quit Press Enter to retry F...

Page 709: ...s the Please Enter System Manager Password prompt type the password and press Enter f Press F12 From the FCP conversion Main Menu Figure 17 49 select option 2 Perform Continue Conversion and press Enter When the screen displays Stopped at stage 10 Continue the Conversion Y N Y prompt press Enter to continue The conver sion resumes from the point where the failure occurred 14 The automatic script r...

Page 710: ...in Figure 17 62 appears Final confirmation before conversion VPM serial 12345 will be converted to Software release 4 X Continue the conversion Y N Y Press Enter to continue Press Esc to quit Figure 17 62 Example of Final Confirmation Before Conversion Screen 15 If the information in the Final confirmation before conversion screen Figure 17 62 is correct press Enter The INSTRUCTION screen shown in...

Page 711: ...r to start SMT emulation Figure 17 64 Instruction Screen for Pressing F12 To Continue FCP Conversion b Press Enter again A few screens flash then the SMT Main Menu appears c If all ports in menu 4 have not been disabled to take the XC1000 out of service perform the steps in section 17 4 From menu 4 press F11 to save the input and return to the SMT Main Menu d If validity checks and garbage collect...

Page 712: ... SECTOR TO BAD WRITE TABLE G CLEAR BAD WRITE TABLE H RESET THE CDR POINTERS I DISK UTILITY J PHRASE RECORD UTILITY K REPLACE DRIVE U UPGRADE SYSTEM DRIVE V VERIFY DRIVE FOR INTEGRITY X EXIT SELECT COPY OPTION Figure 17 66 COPY OPTIONS Menu for Releases 1 55 and 2 X If any errors result from the phrase verification s they must be corrected before continuing the FCP conversion Call the Octel TAC imm...

Page 713: ...ystem drive 0 as follows a Place the backup drive in slot 2 and connect the cable b Turn on XC1000 power c At ENTER BOOT COMMAND type DC The COPY OPTIONS menu appears Figure 17 66 d Type d to select option D SYSTEM ALL OF THE ABOVE to copy software phrases and the database Then press Enter e At ENTER SOURCE DRIVE LOCATION type 0 zero and press Enter f At ENTER ALTERNATE SOURCE DRIVE LOCATION type ...

Page 714: ...ng different status lines are displayed at the bottom of the screen and the PC beeps from time to time This stage of the conversion takes about 10 minutes If the screen blanks while the FCP conversion script is running press Shift to return Eventually the INSTRUCTION screen shown in Figure 17 67 appears You need to 1 Power down the VPM 2 Replace the file card EPROM s 3 Power up the VPM System driv...

Page 715: ...ears is a PRIMARY FILE CARD STATUS reporting a 73 error Do not be alarmed by these messages They are normal Allow the script to continue If the scrolling screens display error messages other than those described within the first 5 minutes then the FCP conversion script could be in a loop because the hardware was not properly installed in previous steps Before continuing call the Octel TAC for assi...

Page 716: ...e 17 69 appears Menu 20 Service Operations Main Menu Enter Choice 1 Drive Verify Utilities 2 Display Status Log 3 SMT Debug Utilities 4 Continue WARNING After all verifications are completed press F12 to quit SMT Emulation and continue the conversion Press Enter to start SMT emulation Figure 17 69 Menu 20 Service Operations With a Warning To Press F12 To Continue Conversion Do not select option 4 ...

Page 717: ...verified S0 S1 type S0 and press Enter The drive serial number is displayed b Verify that the serial number is correct If it is correct type y and press Enter at the Is this the correct drive y n prompt The drive verification begins c When the verification is complete press any key to return to the Drive Verify Utilities menu 33 After verifying the system drive press Enter at the Enter Choice prom...

Page 718: ...s Enter selection Figure 17 72 Reformat Menu for Release 4 X If any errors result from the validity checks they must be corrected before continuing the FCP conversion Call the Octel TAC immediately You will need their assistance to determine the appropriate recovery action Do not attempt to correct the problem s yourself Caution 37 Type 10 to select 10 Check user records vs AMT and press Enter a A...

Page 719: ...tom of the screen and the PC beeps from time to time The new Release 4 X software and phrases are copied from area A to area B on the system drives Company records are converted to user records 1 55 conversions only The download port is restored to its original baud rate and the XC1000 is again rebooted This stage of the conversion can take from 1 to 5 hours depending on the level of software from...

Page 720: ... the Octel TAC to have the engineering bit turned off 17 11 PURGE AND CONVERT FOLLOW ME FORWARD MAILBOXES If the XC1000 is a standalone non networked XC1000 skip this section If the XC1000 is part of a network perform the purge and convert follow me forward mailbox conversion procedure on all voice processors in the network every time a new voice processor is added to the network Refer to the Rele...

Page 721: ...Stage 11 The FCP conversion program shuts down the XC1000 and accesses the offline utilities The program verifies that the engineering option is enabled The program prompts you to perform a phrase verification and to create a backup drive If CB messages are logged during the phrase verification call the Octel TAC Stage 19 The FCP conversion program modifies a software record so that the XC1000 can...

Page 722: ...lled is 73 0F 00 03 00 XX XX XX XX XX This IPL code is normal because the XC1000 has information that has not been updated yet Additionally the prompt table appears to be corrupted However the table is not corrupted it simply has not been updated yet The XC1000 begins upgrading the system drives If power is inter rupted the database might be damaged If damage to the database occurs use the backup ...

Page 723: ... the Octel TAC for assistance Stage 110 The FCP conversion reinstalls system drive 1 During this installation process CB errors might indicate that a bad track has been encountered With Release 3 X and newer bad tracks can be added to a drive that is not installed Use the procedure in section 26 13 to add the bad track to the bad track table Follow the ap propriate steps depending on whether the e...

Page 724: ...At ENTER DISK CYLINDER NUMBER HEX type the cylinder number and press Enter 13 At ENTER DISK HEAD NUMBER HEX type the head number and press Enter 14 At ENTER DISK SECTOR NUMBER HEX type the sector number and press Enter 15 At ADD CYLINDER X HEAD X SECTOR X TO DRIVE N BAD SECTOR TABLE CONTINUE Y N type y if the information displayed is correct Type n if the information is incorrect then repeat steps...

Page 725: ...18 RELEASE 4 X ONLINE UPGRADE INSTRUCTIONS r P N 281 0023 002 2 of 3 ...

Page 726: ...E XC1000 18 6 18 7 1 Connecting the PC Directly to the XC1000 18 6 18 7 2 Connecting the PC Remotely to the XC1000 18 7 18 8 INSTALL THE ONLINE UPGRADE TOOL ON THE PC HARD DRIVE 18 8 18 9 VERIFY THE SETUP IN THE SETUP MENU 18 10 18 10 LOAD SOFTWARE AND PHRASE DISKETTES ON THE PC HARD DRIVE 18 11 18 11 BEGIN THE AUTOMATIC UPGRADE 18 14 18 11 1 Upgrade Phrases 18 15 18 11 2 Upgrade Software 18 19 18...

Page 727: ...7 18 17 5 Read Upgrade Information 18 27 18 17 6 Copy or Delete UPG 18 28 18 17 7 Verify Upgrade Files 18 28 18 17 8 Begin Upgrade from Hard Drive 18 28 18 17 9 Display Upgrade Log File 18 29 18 17 10 Log File F1 While Displaying Upgrade Log File 18 29 18 17 11 Select UPG Directory Copy Delete UPG Menu 18 29 18 17 12 Load UPG to Hard Drive 18 29 18 17 13 Copy UPG to Diskettes 18 29 18 17 14 Delete...

Page 728: ... 11 Figure 18 8 Copy Delete UPG Menu 18 12 Figure 18 9 Screen Prompts for Beginning the File Copy 18 12 Figure 18 10 Verification Message 18 13 Figure 18 11 Example of Status Messages Screen 18 13 Figure 18 12 Status Messages Screen With File Copy Complete Message 18 14 Figure 18 13 UPG Directories Menu 18 15 Figure 18 14 Modem Setup Menu 18 16 Figure 18 15 Status Messages Box With Confirmation Pr...

Page 729: ...ure 18 21 Status Messages Box With Confirmation Prompt 18 20 Figure 18 22 Example of a Status Messages Box With Begin Upgrade Prompt 18 21 Figure 18 23 Example of Online Upgrade Status Screen Showing Upgrade in Progress 18 22 Figure 18 24 Example of Online Upgrade Status Screen Showing Upgrade Complete 18 22 Page ...

Page 730: ...s before beginning an online upgrade The XC1000 must function correctly at Release 3 0X or newer Resolve all errors in the status log or other problems System drive 0 area A must be redundant with system drive 1 area A and system drive 0 area B must be redundant with system drive 1 area B When instructed to type C press the Ctrl and C keys An online Help option is available during the upgrade Pres...

Page 731: ...grade could fail Caution 1 Ensure that the correct equipment is available section 18 3 2 Enable the engineering bit section 18 4 3 Determine the current port baud rate for the system manager terminal SMT section 18 5 4 Verify the system boot area section 18 6 5 Connect the hardware between the PC and the XC1000 section 18 7 6 Install online upgrade tool 1 21A or newer on the PC hard drive section ...

Page 732: ... RAM and at least 20 MB of free space available on the hard drive One 25 foot right angled DB25 15 pin SMT cable P N 057 1174 000 For direct connections if the PC COM 1 port has a 9 pin male connector a female female DB25 DB9 gender changer adapter P N 003 1091 000 or if the PC COM 1 port has a 25 pin male connector a female female DB25 DB25 gender changer adapter P N 003 1092 000 For remote conne...

Page 733: ... XXX with the following EPROMs Low byte P N 039 1289 000 revision 9000 or higher High byte P N 039 1290 000 revision 9000 or higher For ACP support ACP 10 card P N 044 2039 XXX with the following EPROMs Low byte P N 039 1372 000 revision A 9101 or higher High byte P N 039 1373 000 revision A 9101 or higher Two 188 code P N 039 1408 001 revision 9302 or higher 18 3 2 Software Names of software and ...

Page 734: ...ine CPU Serial Channel Review the baud rate information for the port to which the SMT is connected Keep track of the current SMT baud rate for the XC1000 being upgraded 3 Press C twice to return to the SMT Main Menu without making changes 18 6 VERIFY THE SYSTEM BOOT AREA Verify the system boot area as follows 1 At the SMT Main Menu prompt type 20 and press Return to select Menu 20 Service Operatio...

Page 735: ...anger adapter P N 003 1091 000 If the PC COM port has a 25 pin male connector plug the cable into a female female DB25 DB25 gender changer adapter P N 003 1092 000 The PC COM ports are usually located on the back or side of the PC and they usually have 9 pin male connectors 3 Plug the cable and adapter into an available COM port 4 Leave the other end of the SMT cable plugged into the XC1000 s SMT ...

Page 736: ... the AC jack on the modem and into a power outlet 8 Configure the modem parameters as described in the manual provided with the modem Refer to Appendix F for the parameters required by the XC1000 If you have difficulty installing the modem refer to the manual that came with the modem Connect the other modem to the PC as follows 1 Plug one end of the modem cable into the DTE interface port on the m...

Page 737: ...be installed before you can load the upgrade tool For assistance refer to the DOS software manual 2 If screen saver software is installed on the PC disable the software by modifying c autoexec bat on the PC For assistance refer to the screen saver software manual 3 If power management or battery conservation software is installed on the PC disable the software by modifying c autoexec bat on the PC...

Page 738: ...gure 18 3 appears Octel Communications Corporation ONLINE UPGRADE Installation Program v 1 3 About to install ONLINE UPGRADE to your HARD DRIVE Source drive a Target drive c Press CTRL C if this information is NOT correct Press any key to continue Figure 18 3 ONLINE UPGRADE Installation Program Screen 9 Press any key The names of the upgrade files are displayed on the screen as they are copied ont...

Page 739: ... THE SETUP MENU Verify the setup as follows 1 Make sure that the setup values are correct or type the new correct value s as appropriate Press F1 for detailed information about each field When all fields are correct press Enter until the Online Upgrade Main Menu shown in Figure 18 6 appears Escape F2 Help F1 This Option Begins The Upgrade Procedure Online Upgrade Main Menu Begin Automatic Upgrade ...

Page 740: ... an XC1000 has multiple languages phrase diskettes for each language are required Software and phrase diskettes are labeled with file names part numbers and if more than one diskette is required the number of diskettes in each group The procedures for loading software and phrase diskettes onto the PC hard drive are identical Each diskette group is loaded independently however Load software or phra...

Page 741: ... Hard Drive Copy UPG To Diskettes Delete UPG From Hard Drive Change Default Directory Figure 18 8 Copy Delete UPG Menu 3 Use the down arrow key to select the Load UPG To Hard Drive option and press Enter The display shown in Figure 18 9 appears Escape F2 Online Upgrade Main Menu Begin Automatic Upgrade Utilities Menu Setup Menu Online Upgrade 1 21A Copyright c 1994 Octel Communications Corporation...

Page 742: ...kettes Delete UPG From Hard Drive Change Default Directory Copy UPG MS4XXXXX SSU From Drive A To Drive C Y N Y Figure 18 10 Verification Message 5 At the verification message prompt press Enter to accept the default Y Copying then begins Eventually a Status Messages screen appears Figure 18 11 is an example of a Status Messages screen Escape F2 Insert Disk Labeled UPG MS4XXXXX SSU Disk 2 In Drive ...

Page 743: ...e UPG MS4XXXXX SSU File Copy Completed Copy Of UPG MS4XXXXX SSU To Drive C Completed File Copy Complete Press Enter to Continue Status Copy of UPG MS4XXXXX SSU To Drive C Completed Figure 18 12 Status Messages Screen With File Copy Complete Message 7 Remove the final floppy diskette and press Enter The Copy Delete UPG Menu screen Figure 18 8 appears again 8 Press F2 twice and the Online Upgrade Ma...

Page 744: ...pgrade 1 21A Copyright c 1994 Octel Communications Corporation UPG Directories FLOPPY MS4XXXXX SSU 9033XXXX SPU Status Copy of UPG MS4XXXXX ASU To Drive C Completed Figure 18 13 UPG Directories Menu 2 Use the down arrow key to select the appropriate phrase UPG name such as 9033XXXX SPU and press Enter If you are unsure which UPG name to select check the UPG number on the labels of the diskettes th...

Page 745: ... Configuration ____________ Online Upgrade 1 21A Copyright c 1994 Octel Communications Corporation Figure 18 14 Modem Setup Menu 6 At Enter System Manager Password enter the password and press Enter Status messages scroll until a screen similar to the one in Figure 18 15 appears Escape F2 Online Upgrade 1 21A Copyright c 1994 Octel Communications Corporation Online Upgrade Main Menu Begin Automati...

Page 746: ...nformation OK Figure 18 16 Example of a Status Messages Box With Begin Upgrade Prompt 8 If all of the displayed information is correct at Begin Upgrade of UPG Software Language Data Y N Y press Enter to begin the upgrade The Online Upgrade Status screen appears Figure 18 17 is an example of the Online Upgrade Status screen showing an upgrade in progress 9 The upgrade continues for 45 minutes or mo...

Page 747: ... File Length 250880 Bytes Xferred 10240 File IPL3 ABS Files Remaining 021 Figure 18 17 Example of Online Upgrade Status Screen Showing Upgrade In Progress Escape F2 Sync char 43 Packet Response 6 Successfully transmitted packet 1 VPM EOT Response 6 VPM Command Response 0 Online Upgrade 1 21A Copyright c 1994 Octel Communications Corporation Status Messages Online Upgrade Status UPG 9033XXXX SPU Ti...

Page 748: ...UPG name to select check the UPG number on the labels of the diskettes that you loaded in section 18 10 If you are still unsure contact the Octel TAC for assistance 3 The Is This A Remote Upgrade Y N N prompt appears If you are performing the upgrade through a direct connection press Enter and skip to step 5 If you are performing the upgrade remotely type y and press Enter 4 The Modem Setup Menu s...

Page 749: ...A Copyright c 1994 Octel Communications Corporation Online Upgrade Main Menu Begin Automatic Upgrade Utilities Menu Setup Menu Success VPM EOT Resp VPM Command Received Status Info From VPM Reading Version File C PCUPG UPG MS4XXXXX SSU VERSION Status Messages Upgrade UPG MS4XXXXX SSU From Drive C Y N N Status Upgrade Privilege Tested Figure 18 21 Status Messages Box With Confirmation Prompt 7 At U...

Page 750: ...e Data Y N Y press Enter to begin the upgrade The Online Upgrade Status screen appears Figure 18 23 is an example of the Online Upgrade Status screen showing an upgrade in progress 9 The upgrade continues for 2 hours or more depending on system size baud rate languages and so forth Status messages scroll as the upgrade processes are performed The values in the fields flagged by an asterisk change ...

Page 751: ...File Length 250880 Bytes Xferred 10240 File IPL3 ABS Files Remaining 021 Figure 18 23 Example of Online Upgrade Status Screen Showing Upgrade in Progress Escape F2 Sync char 43 Packet Response 6 Successfully transmitted packet 1 VPM EOT Response 6 VPM Command Response 0 Online Upgrade 1 21A Copyright c 1994 Octel Communications Corporation Status Messages Online Upgrade Status UPG MS4XXXXX SSU Tim...

Page 752: ...isplayed including the current software version in the System Boot Area field and the new software version in the area not currently booted Verify that the information is correct 7 Type C and repeat steps 4 through 6 for system drive 1 Enter 1 at the prompt in step 5 8 Type C twice to return to the SMT Main Menu 18 13 VERIFY DRIVE INTEGRITY Verify the drives as follows 1 At the SMT Main Menu promp...

Page 753: ...20 Service Operations 3 Type the number for the Miscellaneous Utilities option and press Return 4 Type the number for the Set System Boot Area option and press Return The current System Boot Area and Drive Next Boot Area fields are displayed showing the software versions of the current System Boot Area field 5 At Enter area A or B type the letter designating the area not currently used as the syst...

Page 754: ...n turned on 2 At the SMT Main Menu prompt type 20 and press Return to select Menu 20 Service Operations 3 Type the number for the Drive Copy Utilities option and press Return 4 Type the number for the Make Drive s Redundant option and press Return 5 Type the number for the Make Software Areas A and B Redundant option and press Return 6 The current System Boot Area and Drive Next Boot Area fields a...

Page 755: ...he UPG Directories are listed by the names of the software and phrase diskettes A FLOPPY option is also listed which allows a user to run the Online Upgrade from the diskette s in the floppy drive as opposed to previously loaded PC hard drive UPG Directories The user must select the appropriate UPG Directory for the Online Upgrade to run The software then prompts the user with Erase Upgrade Log Fi...

Page 756: ... D Directory Enter the default directory path where the UPG files are stored ex PCUPG UPG Display Type Enter the PC monitor display type M monochrome or C color COM Port Enter the PC COM port physically connecting the VPM Baud Rate Enter the VPM SMT port s set baud rate 9600 or 19200 To accept ALL values after inputted properly press Enter through all the fields and Enter again to accept 18 17 4 S...

Page 757: ...he files within the directory are NOT corrupt Upon first selecting this option the user is prompted to select a UPG Directory or if the Select UPG Directory option was selected prior the software will assume the same previously selected UPG Directory The software then prompts the user with verification that the selected UPG Directory is the correct UPG Directory The software will then run an autom...

Page 758: ... selecting this option the user is prompted to select a UPG Directory The selected UPG Directory is placed in a buffer for subsequent operations to be performed within the Utilities Menu or subsequent operations to be performed within the Copy Delete UPG Menu 18 17 12 Load UPG to Hard Drive This option allows the user to load UPG files from software or phrase diskettes in directories on the hard d...

Page 759: ... 17 14 Delete UPG from Hard Drive This option allows the user to delete UPG Directories created from software or phrase diskettes from the hard drive as specified in the Setup Menu Upon first selecting this option the user is prompted to select a UPG Directory or if the Select UPG Directory option was selected prior the software will assume the same previously selected UPG Directory The software t...

Page 760: ...19 RELEASE 4 0 SYSTEM UTILITIES P N 281 0023 002 Part 3 of 3 r ...

Page 761: ...shing Dial Tone Detect Port Testing Parameters 19 3 19 2 1 2 Establishing Loopback Testing Parameters 19 6 19 2 2 Port Test Status 19 7 19 2 2 1 Port Testing Status When Test Is Not in Process 19 7 19 2 2 2 Port Testing Status When Test Is in Process 19 8 19 2 3 Review Previous Test Results 19 9 19 2 4 Start Port Testing 19 12 19 3 HIGHLIGHTS 19 13 Section Page ...

Page 762: ...he Port Testing Administration Screen 19 3 Figure 19 5 Example of Status Code 151 19 5 Figure 19 6 Example of Status Code 152 19 5 Figure 19 7 Example of the Port Testing Status Screen When Testing Is Not In Process 19 7 Figure 19 8 Example of the Port Testing Status Screen When a Test Is In Process 19 8 Figure 19 9 Example of the Testing Results Review Screen 19 9 Figure 19 10 Example of the Port...

Page 763: ...port testing utility can be used at scheduled intervals or immediately if necessary 19 2 PORT TESTING UTILITIES Use the port testing utilities to test the basic outcalling functions of each port on the XC1000 To display the port testing utilities menu follow these steps 12 From the SMT Main Menu select option 20 System Utilities and press Return If the service option is enabled and the XC1000 is o...

Page 764: ...g Enter Choice Figure 19 3 Port Testing Utilities Menu The Port Testing Utilities menu offers the following options Port Testing Administration section 19 2 1 Port Test Status section 19 2 2 Review Previous Test Results section 19 2 3 Start Port Testing section 19 2 4 19 2 1 Port Testing Administration The port testing administration option allows the parameters for port tests to be established On...

Page 765: ...itches that do not provide dial tone the dial tone detect test passes Ports are tested randomly one at a time until all ports are tested To establish dial tone detect port testing parameters refer to Figure 19 4 and complete the following fields Port Testing Schedule 1 Enter the time that the first scheduled test should start Use the format HH MMA or HH MMP The default for this field is a blank If...

Page 766: ...e Port Testing Schedule X fields If a manual test is running when a scheduled test is to start the scheduled test is skipped The scheduled test runs the next time it is due unless there is another conflict with a manual test Maximum Time Allowable for Testing Enter the maximum amount of time in minutes that a scheduled test should run regardless of whether the test has been completed For example i...

Page 767: ... If a port test error status code 151 or 152 is logged in the status log and there is no accompanying outcalling error verify that the Port Testing Administration screen Figure 19 4 was configured correctly and run the test again It is possible that a configuration problem in the Port Testing Administration screen caused a repeated busy or ring no answer situation on the port being tested Type of ...

Page 768: ...ct that another voice processor has received the outcall The port being tested generates an autovon A tone and listens for an autovon A tone in response Perform the loopback test either by having the XC1000 call a hunt group on the same XC1000 or call a remote voice processor s port or hunt group Ports are tested randomly one at a time until all ports are tested To establish loopback port testing ...

Page 769: ...n appears as shown in Figure 19 7 1A Port Testing Status 1B 1C 1D 2A 2B 2C 2D 3A 3B 3C 3D 4A 4B 4C 4D 5A 5B 5C 5D 6A 6B 6C 6D Pt Pt Status Status Screen will automatically update Press Ctrl C to exit Enter R eturn to the first page N ext page Box 3591 Node 1 Box 3467 Node 5 Figure 19 7 Example of the Port Testing Status Screen When Testing Is Not In Process If no test is in process the Port Testin...

Page 770: ... process the Port Testing Status screen displays the real time test status of each port The screen is automatically updated as each port is tested to display changes in the port status A port s status might change more than once during a port test A port is not considered to have failed a port test unless the test has been unsuccessful three times The retry interval for failed tests for a port is ...

Page 771: ...xt page to view the status of additional ports press the N key To return to the previous page press R To cancel the port test press A then enter a Y and press Return to confirm cancellation 19 2 3 Review Previous Test Results To review the results of the last four port tests select option 3 Review Previous Test Results from the Port Testing Utilities menu Figure 19 3 and press Return The first Tes...

Page 772: ...rt when the test is complete The following is a list of status and error conditions that might be reported after a port test and appropriate corrective actions if required WAITING The XC1000 was unable to test the specified port before the time allowed for testing expired If required extend the maximum time allowed for testing and run the port test again SEIZE LINE FAIL The XC1000 was unable to ta...

Page 773: ...er entered in the Phone Number field on the Port Testing Administration screen Figure 19 4 However there was no answer when the telephone number was dialed If RING NO ANSWER is reported verify the following The telephone number was entered correctly in the Phone Number field on the Port Testing Administration screen The dialing sequence was entered correctly in the Dialing Sequence field on the Po...

Page 774: ...screen is configured start a manual unscheduled port test by selecting option 4 Start Port Testing from the Port Testing Utilities menu Figure 19 3 and pressing Return The port test immediately begins and the Port Testing Status screen appears as shown in Figure 19 10 1A Port Testing Status 1B 1C 1D 2A 2B 2C 2D 3A 3B 3C 3D 4A 4B 4C 4D 5A 5B 5C 5D 6A 6B 6C 6D Pt Pt Status Status Test in process Scr...

Page 775: ...2 2 2 19 3 HIGHLIGHTS A port testing utility was added to the service operations utilities accessed through Menu 20 Service Operations on the SMT The port testing utility can be accessed only in the online mode The port testing utility can be performed at scheduled intervals or can be performed immediately if necessary The Port Testing Administration option allows parameters for port tests to be e...

Page 776: ...20 RELEASE 4 1 SYSTEM UTILITIES P N 281 0033 000 ...

Page 777: ...PLAYING CDR EVENT CODES 20 3 20 2 4 DISPLAYING ONLINE CDR DATA 20 4 20 2 5 ENABLING AND DISABLING CDR BUFFER ALARMS 20 8 TABLE Table 20 1 Field Descriptions for Menu 20 2 2 Online CDR Utility 20 6 FIGURES Figure 20 1 Menu 20 2 Online CDR Utility 20 2 Figure 20 2 First Screen of Menu 20 2 1 Display CDR Event Codes 20 3 Figure 20 3 Menu 20 2 2 Online CDR Utility 20 6 Figure 20 4 Example of Search Re...

Page 778: ... uses the same data as CDR and the Octel DecisionProt Reporting Package but it does not affect the collection of CDR events or the operation of Octel PC CDR or DecisionPro 20 2 ONLINE CDR UTILITY The following sections describe new CDR events how to access the Online CDR Utility menu how to display CDR event codes and online CDR data and how to enable and disable CDR buffer alarms 20 2 1 DESCRIBIN...

Page 779: ...t is generated indicating that the message action was Help Operator Any key or action that terminates review of an individual message is recorded Message review events and existing CDR events such as message send allow a message to be tracked throughout its existence You can collect message review events by enabling menu 16 1 4 option 10 for a list of up to ten mailboxes or in a special case for a...

Page 780: ...ÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ The first screen of menu 20 2 1 Display CDR Event Codes shown in Figure 20 2 appears ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ 5 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Press any key to continue to sub sequent screens of the CDR event codes There are 5 screens When finished type C to return to menu 20 2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ...

Page 781: ...Á ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ 1 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Log on to the SMT ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ The Main Menu appears ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ 2 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Enter 20 and press Return ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Menu 20 Service Operations appears ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ 3 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Enter 2 and press Return ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ...

Page 782: ...f no events match the specified criteria the XC1000 prompts WAITING FOR NEXT CDR EVENT TO BE WRITTEN REAL TIME MODE switches to real time mode and waits for that event to occur If the end date and time have passed the XC1000 displays the CDR EVENT SEARCH COMPLETE PRESS CONTROL C TO EXIT prompt ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ 8 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ...

Page 783: ...hes into near real time mode when the search is complete In near real time mode the XC1000 waits for events that match the criteria until the end date is reached Start Time 12 00A The XC1000 searches for events logged on or after the time entered End Time 11 59P The XC1000 searches for events logged on or before the time entered If you enter an end time that is after the current date and time the ...

Page 784: ...C1000 displays events related to the message IDs entered A message ID is used to track all the events related to a specific message If field is left blank the XC1000 displays events related to all message IDs on the XC1000 Message IDs are obtained from the user record or from status log entries This field typically is used only by service personnel Event s Up to 10 valid event numbers or blank The...

Page 785: ...1 042aa0b8 Len1 35 Len2 0 FaxID 0 FaxPage 0 23 MAR 95 11 49 59AM MSGCNT MESSAGE COUNT Port 1A When Exit Box 1234 Unheard Voice 7 Heard Voice 10 Archived Voice 0 Unheard Fax 0 Heard Fax 0 Archived Fax 0 Figure 20 4 Example of Search Results for Online CDR Utility 20 2 5 ENABLING AND DISABLING CDR BUFFER ALARMS Caution If you are using CDR for billing purposes or are download ing CDR to a PC regular...

Page 786: ...s displayed The cursor is at the Toggle NSA alarm Y N field ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ 5 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Enter Y to toggle the NSA alarm or N to leave it as is Press Return ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ The Toggle SA alarm Y N field ap pears ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ ÁÁÁ 6 ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á...

Page 787: ...APPENDIXES ...

Page 788: ...ss System Dimensions 64 inches high 26 inches wide 19 inches deep per cabinet System Weight 500 pounds minimum to 700 pounds maxi mum per cabinet Terminal and Printer Location Prepare a location within 50 cable feet of the XC1000 preferably next to the system for a direct connection for the SMT and printer Octel provides a 25 foot cable If the SMT must be located more than 50 cable feet from the X...

Page 789: ...33 000 Two kits are required for a dual cabinet XC1000 Installation Install before XC1000 is delivered Installation Instructions Review and follow the steps in the floor mount installation instructions shipped with the kit Cabling Requirements Telephone lines MLHG or T1 established and available using 25 pair male Amphenol connectors Data links established and available RDAC line established and a...

Page 790: ...ctel standard warranty Two of these exceptions are defined in this section Other exceptions can be negotiated as part of a Purchase Agreement or other contractual vehicle In general the standard warranty should apply B 1 2 1 90 Day Warranty Exceptions to the 90 day warranty occur when an XC1000 upgrade is performed during the 1 year warranty period of an existing XC1000 If there are more than 90 d...

Page 791: ...rking hours is billed at Octel s then current labor rates During the warranty period Octel will use reasonable efforts during Octel s normal business hours to respond to emergency service major maintenance within 4 hours if the site is within a 100 mile radius of the supporting office All other service activity will be responded to within 24 hours The following occurrences are considered major mai...

Page 792: ...ed Warranties do not cover the following Products modified without the approval of Octel Communications Products subjected to unusual physical or electrical stress Products altered or with the original identification marks removed Products with unauthorized repair or installation Some product parts such as drives might not be manufactured by Octel How ever Octel warrants these parts the same as th...

Page 793: ...t part return the defective part to Octel Communications immediately A shipping label and RMA tag are enclosed with the replacement part 4 Place the static protected part in the antistatic packaging provided by Octel If Octel packaging is not available similar packaging can be used Make sure that the package provides adequate static and mechanical protection 5 Make sure that the RMA number is on t...

Page 794: ...t for any reason Inability to collect call detail record CDR data Message waiting feature not functioning Networking not functioning Data Module Inability to access the data module through the data module terminal Inability to access the XC1000 through system manager terminal SMT emulation Inability to access the data module through the fax board voice board X 25 interface board or service modem I...

Page 795: ...vels are defined as follows Level 1 Local Service 1 A local supporting field engineer or technician arrives at the customer s site or accesses the system through the RDAC or through the data module s internal modem 2 Fault isolation is attempted If the fault is not isolated within 2 hours the problem is escalated to Level 2 Local operations management is notified Most distributors and VIS accounts...

Page 796: ...D OPERATIONS MANAGER EAST OR WEST APPROPRIATE SALES MANAGER PRODUCT TECHNICAL SUPPORT MANAGER VICE PRESIDENT OF CUSTOMER SUPPORT GROUP EXECUTIVE VP OF OPERATIONS EXECUTIVE MANAGEMENT TEAM LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 YES NO YES NO YES NO LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 MAJOR MAINTENANCE 2 HOURS 2 HOURS UNTIL RESOLUTION MINOR MAINTENANCE NO TIME LIMITS DEPENDS ON SEVERITY OF PROBLEM AND CUSTOMER SATISFACTION MA...

Page 797: ... The problem remains at Level 3 until it is solved C 2 2 Minor Maintenance Escalation Minor maintenance escalations are made by local support in conjunction with the customer The timing between escalation levels differs depending on the severity of the problem and customer satisfaction In any case the problem is escalated as soon as it is apparent that the next highest level of support is necessar...

Page 798: ...iving the attention it deserves or if the resolution is not timely enough notify the appropriate member of the Octel account team as listed below Acount Manager Executive Account Support Specialist Operations Management Appropriate account team members include those on the following list National Technical Assistance Center Keith Gengler Technical Assistance Center Supervisor 215 941 3391 Tom Pana...

Page 799: ...CD Reason Code Categories 1xxx File System errors 11xx SRAM errors 12xx IPL errors 2xxx DCM errors 3xxx AT errors 4xxx MF errors 5xxx VTX errors 6xxx OS errors Axxx General system errors Bxxx SBI related errors Exxx ESDI disk related errors Category Reason Code Table D 2 lists the error types that can be reported in offsets 44 and 45 of the CD status code Most of the reason codes listed in Table D...

Page 800: ...t bad drive 4000 Update of primary copy of RAT record allocation table to disk failed 4001 Update of RAT backup copy failed 4002 RAT could not be read from disk at initialization time 4003 RAT backup could not be read from disk at initialization time 4004 Recovery of primary RAT from backup copy failed 4005 Speech buffer write failed must allocate a new record General system hardware errors A000 E...

Page 801: ...ULL segment selector A027 SW problem data structure misaligned A028 NVRAM error log vars malfunctioned reinitialized the log A029 DRAM pointer to error logging area size malfunctioned A030 Drive 5 V power fault A031 Drive write violation AFFF General error SBI related errors B000 SBI B002 SBI DMA buffer not within data segment B004 I380 s DMA byte count for SBI not expired B005 Bad SBI INT source ...

Page 802: ...d E011 Seek address out of bounds E012 Read write failure cannot find specified sector E013 Sector count field in the DRB is maximum sector count E014 DMA data overrun error E015 Bad drive number or status record E016 DRB s SCT field exceeds allowable size E017 Function can only be performed on a format station E020 Read write failure ID data error STR 24 E021 Read write failure Missing byte sync ...

Page 803: ...t error rate SETUP_NEXT_REQUEST errors E500 Trying to lose a request E501 Switched buffer but no requests are in it Drive execution errors E600 ESDI controller command execution fails E604 ESDI controller command timeout took 1 second E605 Spinup taking too long drive taken OOS E606 More than three drive varieties E607 Drive initialization from statistics fails E608 Recalibration taking too long E...

Page 804: ...e EPROM changes can also occur Before performing a software upgrade on a XC1000 use Table E 1 to determine the required EPROMs and hardware necessary for the upgrade Sometimes software upgrades require new hardware Verify that the existing hardware is compatible with the new software ...

Page 805: ...2053 02X P N 244 2053 02X 2 0X 3 0X Low U18J High U17J Low U18J High U17J P N 039 1402 001 Rev 9312 P N 039 1403 001 Rev 9312 P N 039 1402 002 Rev 9314 P N 039 1403 002 Rev 9314 1A12 6752 25BA 67E3 F10 File Card P N 244 2005 0XX P N 244 2005 0XX P N 244 2005 0XX 2 10 NSR b 1 2X 1 3X 1 5X 2 0X NSR 3 0X NSR Low U8V High U10V Low U8V High U10V Low U8V High U10V P N 039 1274 000 Rev 9003 P N 039 1275 ...

Page 806: ...271 001 Rev 9003 P N 039 1270 004 Rev 9201 P N 039 1271 004 Rev 9201 3190 3D4F D15A 9444 Universal Digital Line Card UDLC P N 244 2058 0XX 2 0X and above Low U51 High U52 P N 039 1441 000 Rev 9302 P N 039 1440 000 Rev 9302 A752 0IE7 T1 TIC P N 244 2002 000 P N 244 2002 0XX 2 10b 1 20 1 3X 1 5X NSR 1 54X 1 55 SR Above 1 55 SR Low U5T High U5U Low U5T High U5U P N 039 1289 000 Rev 9000 P N 139 1290 ...

Page 807: ...ransaction or session Improper or incom plete termination will cause the communication path to remain open and vulnerable to unauthorized access for approximately 10 minutes For additional security install a black box interception device that will detect carrier drop and immediately log out of the SMT port F 2 CONFIGURING THE VOICE PROCESSOR MODEM The configuration for the voice processor modem di...

Page 808: ...05 008 S06 002 S07 050 S08 002 S09 006 S10 014 S11 095 S12 050 S18 000 S25 005 S26 001 S36 007 S37 009 S38 020 S44 003 S46 002 S48 007 S49 008 S50 016 S97 030 S108 002 S109 062 S110 002 STORED PROFILE 0 B16 B1 B41 B60 E0 L2 M1 N1 P Q1 V1 W0 X4 Y0 A0 CO DO G0 J0 K0 Q0 R1 S0 T4 U1 X0 S00 001 S02 043 S06 002 S07 050 S08 002 S09 006 S10 014 S11 095 S12 050 S18 000 S25 005 S26 001 S36 007 S37 009 S38 0...

Page 809: ...After the options have been entered press the Print Send key to save the changes n After making the changes to menu 6 3 you must reboot the voice processor for the changes to take effect Refer to the appropriate section of the System Manager Manual for the system shutdown procedure o Start up the voice processor At ENTER BOOT COMMAND type a to place the voice processor into normal operation p Veri...

Page 810: ...e the command AT F Y0 W0 and press Enter to recall the factory defaults and write them to profile 0 5 Type the command ATW1 WO for RETURN key negotiation messages The default settings with the negotiation message setting will be used when the modem is powered up 6 Verify the modem settings by typing the command AT V and pressing Enter Refer to Figure F 2 for the correct configuration values Refer ...

Page 811: ...ransmission See also Asynchronous transmis sion Address The label name or number that designates a location where information is stored Address Mapping Table See AMT Alphanumeric 1 Refers to either the entire set of 128 ASCII characters or the subset of ASCII characters that includes the 26 alphabetic characters and the 10 numeric characters 2 Pertains to a character set that contains both letters...

Page 812: ... you got to this point and report as soon as possible to mailbox XX The voice processor plays this prompt after recording an unrecoverable error The voice processor returns the subscriber to the mailbox Main Menu after playing this prompt If the error is recorded twice in the same session the subscriber is disconnected Area of interest See AOI Arrow keys The four directional keys on the keyboard t...

Page 813: ...er used to represent one of the two digits in the binary numbering system Bit The abbreviation for binary digit A bit is the smallest unit of data handled by a computer Bits per second See bps Board A flat thin rectangular XC1000 component that includes connectors test points switches and LEDs See also Card Boot To start up and to load a computer The set of instructions that reside on ROM indicate...

Page 814: ...ltative Committee for Telephone and Telegraph An advisory committee established in 1959 to study and recommend answers to questions about technical operation and tariffs The organization is attempting to establish standards for worldwide intercountry operation CCS common channel signaling A network architecture based on SS7 protocol for the exchange of information between telecommunications nodes ...

Page 815: ... point to which all grounding paths in the CO are connected electrically Physically it consists of a copper bus bar In telephone buildings of more than one floor a CO ground bus bar is provided on each floor These bus bars are connected by a vertical ground riser consisting of a copper cable or bus bar of large cross section Command A word mnemonic or character that by virtue of its syntax in a li...

Page 816: ...the screen Cyclical redundancy check See CRC D Database 1 A collection of data residing on a computer which allows easy access to the information it contains 2 Collection of interrelated data items organized by a consistent scheme that allows data items to be processed without regard to physical storage locations Data circuit terminating equipment See DCE Data entry field See Field Data link integ...

Page 817: ...eric characters required by the voice proces sor to transfer calls to an attendant or specific extension or to place a message notification outcall Dial by name table A feature of the voice processor that allows callers to access a subscriber s mailbox by using the telephone keypad to dial the name of the subscriber DID direct inward dial 1 Trunk from the CO that provides direct access to a teleph...

Page 818: ...sed to compress digitized voice samples on the DLC DTE data terminal equipment Equipment that consists of digital end instruments These end instruments convert user information into data signals for transmission or reconvert the received data signals into user information DTMF dual tone multifrequency Tones generated by the touch tone keys on a telephone Unique tones are produced by each key DTMF ...

Page 819: ...n levels There are two escalation processes depending on whether the problem is considered major or minor maintenance ESD electrostatic discharge A surge of static electricity that results from the static charge buildup on two nonconductive surfaces that can cause damage to sensitive electronic equipment ESDI enhanced small device interface High speed serial interface that provides a communication...

Page 820: ...st announcement heard by callers when they reach the voice processor if there was no answer from the number dialed Greetings can be personal or system greetings Ground bus window Large copper frame that is directly connected to the earth and holds many connection points for electronic equipment to receive a ground reference The ground bus window is part of a single point ground system Ground start...

Page 821: ...sed by the same lead number The switch beginning at the first line in the group hunts through the stations or trunks in that group routing the call to the first idle line it finds in the group I ICMB Information Center mailboxes These mailboxes store recorded information or announcements that can be accessed by subscribers dialing the mailbox number or by anyone calling the voice processor These m...

Page 822: ...y using option B READ DISK TABLE from install option I DISK UTILITY Instruction line Area that displays instructions for the current operation located at the bottom of voice processor screens and menus Integrated system A configuration that enables the voice processor to receive call identification and status information on forwarded calls Callers forwarded into the voice processor can record mess...

Page 823: ... the next block of a file Log A record that contains entries generated by the voice processor The entries are useful for troubleshooting tracking inconsistencies and monitoring voice processor activity The log can be viewed or printed using menu 13 option 2 or 3 Logic card See card Logical terminal number See LTN Login A combination of numbers and characters that must be entered to access the data...

Page 824: ...s functions from which the system manager can select to perform operations or establish parameters Menu driven Designation of an on line voice processor in which the Main Menu lists other more detailed menus that enable users to select the specific type of function to be performed without typing command lines Menu option Each choice listed in a menu Menu 0 Menu that appears on the system manager t...

Page 825: ...character NMT name management table Used with the dial by name feature The name management table matches the DTMF digits dialed to the unique numeric equivalent of the mailbox name entered in menu 8 Nonpeak traffic A time when the usage on the voice processor is at its lowest point System backups should be performed during nonpeak traffic periods Non service affecting alarm See NSA alarm NSA non s...

Page 826: ...ne extension home telephone number pager and so on to inform the subscriber of new messages Out of service alarm See OOS alarm Outside caller A person accessing the voice processor who is not a subscriber A person accessing the system in a manner that the voice processor does not recognize as a subscriber P Q Parallel transmission In data communications a method of data transfer in which all bits ...

Page 827: ...voice processor See also System phrases Phrase table The phrase table is one of the software components located on system drives zero and one The phrase tables direct the CPU to phrases stored on the system drives Phrases are part of the user interface and are played in response to caller or subscriber actions Using option B PHRASES from the copy option menu copies the phrase table and phrases fro...

Page 828: ...between two devices A protocol defines the capability of two devices to use the same procedures and understand each other Public data network See PDN Pulse code modulation See PCM R Radio frequency interference See RFI RAM random access memory The working area of the computer where applications programs can be loaded and executed Random access memory RAM See RAM RDAC remote diagnostic administrati...

Page 829: ... at the same frequency and along the same path Ringback tone Standard tone indicating that the telephone dialed is ringing Ring no answer See RNA RMA return material authorization number Assigned by Octel to customers for all parts and products being returned to Octel Communications An RMA tag must accompany all returned parts RNA ring no answer Caller hears ring back tone but the call is not answ...

Page 830: ...g the voice processor Service personnel Octel or customer service engineers In this manual service personnel or service engineers are those who have successfully completed the Octel Communication s training program for service personnel Shutdown A process used to terminate activity on the voice processor in an orderly manner for troubleshooting upgrading software or hardware or adding applications...

Page 831: ...ion lines Wires that provide voice paths between telephone sets and the PBX or Centrex Subscriber Person who has been assigned a voice mailbox on the voice processor Subscrib ers can be located on or off the premises and are not required to have a telephone extension on the premises These subscribers have access to voice processor features as designated by their classes of service SVC switched vir...

Page 832: ... voice processor sign off message and recording names for system distribution lists System manager passwords The two number sequences entered on the keyboard of the system manager terminal to gain access to the system manager Main Menu and other system manager functions The same number sequences can be entered on the telephone keypad to allow access to system manager mailboxes System manager termi...

Page 833: ...efining the voice pair on a telephone line The ring is the side providing battery The tip is the return or ground side Tip and ring wires Pair of conductors associated with the transmission portion of circuits and apparatus Tone detection Capability of the voice processor to detect and recognize DTMF tones Traffic The number of calls placed on a voice processing module or line Voice processors or ...

Page 834: ...d See UR UR user record Space that is 800 hexadecimal bytes long that contains all informa tion pertinent to a mailbox Utility Any general purpose program included in an operating system to perform common maintenance functions V Validity checks Checks performed on subscriber mailboxes by the purge task Each mailbox user record contains checkpoints with each checkpoint having a defined range of val...

Page 835: ...ng the telephone is the entry point to the system Voice processing application See Application Voice processor A general term that refers to the XC1000 multiple applications platform See also XC1000 W X Y Z Winchester disk drive In general the term Winchester refers to any disk system where both the write read heads and the disk media reside in a sealed module using a V 35 connector Wink start Sig...

Page 836: ...d 10 25 illustrated 10 1 replacing 8 48 through 8 50 50 through 58 status codes 7 12 7 13 60 status code 7 13 7 14 61 status code 7 14 64 status code 7 15 7 16 65 status code 7 16 7 17 7 53 70 status code 7 17 through 7 20 72 status code 7 17 through 7 20 73 error FCP conversion 14 31 75 ohm adapter board connections for E1 TICs or PTICs 2 15 through 2 18 3 21 through 3 23 75 status code 7 20 thro...

Page 837: ...oard configuration 3 40 3 44 10 30 distribution board connections 3 24 3 25 external alarm connections 2 19 through 2 21 hardware alarms 5 5 5 6 monitor card configuration 3 42 3 43 monitor card configuration switch settings 10 9 non service affecting NSA 6 29 through 6 31 alarm status menu interpretation 5 5 5 6 audible alarm configuration switches 3 42 3 43 connections 2 19 through 2 21 3 24 3 2...

Page 838: ... channel correlation 7 55 7 56 Analog TICs types of 10 16 Angle brackets 3 15 Antistatic precautions 2 4 3 2 5 15 A pager dialing sequence code 4 47 Areas A and B see System drives Arrow keys 4 3 Asynchronous communications processor ACP card see also ACP I O distribution boards boot process display 4 25 4 26 configuration 3 44 described 11 1 11 2 dip switch settings 3 44 integration links 4 54 th...

Page 839: ... 6 4 1 4 53 12 22 13 23 menu 6 5 4 55 12 24 13 25 SMT XC1000 communications 4 11 15 4 15 5 Baud Rate field menu 6 4 1 4 53 12 22 13 23 menu 6 5 4 55 12 24 13 25 BBL type pagers 4 46 B boot command 4 23 Begin Automatic Upgrade option Release 3 02 online help 15 19 15 20 Begin Upgrade from Hard Drive option Release 3 02 online help 15 22 Binary conversions 4 22 6 13 B LED 11 14 11 15 Boards see Card...

Page 840: ...gration data link connections 3 27 MTA data link connections 3 27 port assignments 3 25 3 26 busy out controller 3 28 disk drives 8 11 inspecting 5 14 intercabinet signal cables 3 12 3 13 main distribution board 3 24 3 25 PC and XC1000 Release 3 02 FCP conversion 14 20 14 21 Release 3 02 online upgrade 15 5 15 6 power and grounds intercabinet 3 13 3 14 primary 3 16 through 3 18 printer 3 29 3 30 S...

Page 841: ...tions 2 10 2 14 2 15 card configuration test 6 19 6 20 common control cards 10 4 through 10 13 connectors 8 3 described 1 2 through 1 4 destination card address in status log 7 5 electrical safety 3 2 3 3 EPROM replacement 8 9 through 8 11 extractor lever 8 3 8 4 guide pins 8 3 interaction with drives call flow 1 4 line card groups 10 14 through 10 24 logic bay slot assignments 3 30 through 3 34 3...

Page 842: ...tatus code port task source and channel correlation 7 55 7 56 Channel Type field 4 50 through 4 53 12 20 12 21 13 21 through 13 23 Check AMT vs user records reformat option 11 9 37 9 38 Check sum computation 9 13 CHECKSUM ERROR ON RESPONSE PACKET message 9 3 Check user records vs AMT reformat option 10 9 37 CIC RDAC command 6 35 Cleaning and inspecting the XC1000 5 12 through 5 14 Clearance requir...

Page 843: ...ssages CB OUT messages displaying CB packet trace table 9 13 9 16 9 17 messages 7 7 7 8 7 57 7 58 Conversion is not allowed message 14 25 Convert ICMB from COS to MB reformat option 13 9 38 Convert Mailboxes to ACP Integration reformat option 3 9 31 9 32 Convert Mailbox Length reformat option 6 9 35 through 9 37 Convert System Distribution Lists to Mailboxes reformat option 14 9 38 12 16 12 17 13 ...

Page 844: ...oftware utility Release 3 0 16 6 16 7 COPY SYSTEM DATA TABLES copy option C 9 22 9 23 Copy System Data Tables utility Release 3 0 16 7 16 8 Copy UPG to Diskettes option Release 3 02 online help 15 23 15 24 C pager dialing sequence code 4 47 CPI RDAC call status 6 35 CPU C10 CPU described 10 5 10 7 memory upgrade 12 9 through 12 13 C20 CPU described 10 6 10 8 Release 2 X requirement 13 2 resistor p...

Page 845: ...ld 4 54 12 23 13 24 Data comm ports 10 29 Datafiles see also Datafile Utilities Release 3 0 Records decreasing CDR buffer size 16 39 16 40 described 16 3 16 34 16 35 displaying logical address 16 41 16 42 message blocks 16 42 16 43 message physical address 16 44 phrase blocks 16 43 physical address 16 40 16 41 records 16 36 16 37 expanding size 16 37 through 16 39 reading records 16 35 16 36 recor...

Page 846: ...k Calls field 4 46 Dialing sequences in band integration 4 48 4 49 international calls 4 45 4 46 local calls 4 45 pagers 4 46 through 4 48 BBL type 4 46 dialing sequence codes 4 47 4 48 Spectrum type 4 46 private network calls 4 46 reconnect 4 45 transfer 4 45 Dialing Sequence to Activate Message Waiting field 4 49 Dialing Sequence to Deactivate Message Waiting field 4 49 Dialing Sequence to Trans...

Page 847: ...r board failure symptoms 8 16 replacing 8 16 through 8 22 addressing and terminating a drive 8 23 board layout 8 21 drive repair kits 8 17 jumper positions 8 21 verifying part numbers 8 16 through 8 18 Disk drive backplanes 1 3 10 31 Disk drive bus terminator board replacement 8 62 through 8 65 Disk drives see also Drive modules File cards adding message drives 8 38 through 8 40 alarms 5 5 6 26 6 ...

Page 848: ...3 0 system utilities 16 9 through 16 16 Release 3 02 online upgrade 15 18 15 19 operating software 1 4 PC hard drive FCP conversion tool installation 14 16 loading software and phrases from diskettes 14 17 through 14 20 Mirror III installation 14 14 through 14 16 power problems 6 5 6 6 reading disk records 9 8 9 9 read only operation 9 29 16 31 16 32 recovering defective file record 9 14 9 15 Rele...

Page 849: ...ding Release 3 02 software and phrases 15 9 through 15 13 14 17 through 14 20 running Release 3 02 online upgrade from diskettes 15 20 Disk I O adapter board replacement 8 15 Disk Space Critical alarm 5 5 6 26 6 27 Disk Space Low alarm 5 5 6 29 6 30 Disk table reading 9 9 9 10 writing 9 12 DISK TABLE READ OPTIONS menu 9 9 9 10 DISK UTILITY copy option I 9 26 install option I 9 7 through 9 13 DISK ...

Page 850: ...A and B Redundant 16 10 16 11 Make System Drives Redundant 16 12 through 16 16 overview 16 3 Drive Install Utilities menu 16 21 16 22 Drive Install Utilities Release 3 0 16 21 through 16 25 De Install Drive 16 23 16 24 Initialize System 16 24 16 25 Install Drive 16 22 16 23 overview 16 21 16 22 Drive modules see also Disk drives described 10 30 through 10 32 disassembling 8 12 through 8 15 illustr...

Page 851: ...21 10 22 line type assignment 4 36 through 4 38 logic bay slot locations 3 36 port assignment 4 35 4 36 port information 4 38 through 4 40 replacing cards after shutdown 8 2 through 8 5 hot plug 8 5 through 8 8 status code port task source and channel correlation 7 55 7 56 switch locations 3 37 symmetrical pair connection 2 16 2 18 terminal connection configuration 3 37 Earthquake protection 3 14 ...

Page 852: ...e stamp 4 30 Fatal Error Can t Load Application 6 21 FATAL ERROR DETECTED 6 9 FCP conversion 14 24 through 14 26 LOAD APPLICATION FAILED 6 21 NO RESPONSE TO CB MESSAGE 9 3 PRIMARY FILE CARD STATUS 73 error 14 31 special status indicators 9 2 9 3 TIMEOUT WAITING FOR CARD TO COME READY 9 3 UNRECOGNIZED ERROR 9 3 ESD requirements 2 4 3 2 5 15 Exiting SMT session 4 41 Expand Datafile Size menu 16 38 E...

Page 853: ...26 garbage collect 14 11 through 14 13 14 35 loading software FCP conversion tool 1 00 14 16 Mirror III 14 14 through 14 16 preparation 14 13 14 14 software and phrase diskettes to PC 14 17 through 14 20 Main Menu 14 17 14 22 major steps 14 2 14 3 online upgrade comparison 15 1 overview 14 1 14 2 performing the conversion 14 21 through 14 36 backing up system drive zero 14 29 14 30 error screen 14...

Page 854: ...ng relevant menus 14 11 purging and converting Follow Me Forward mailboxes 14 36 requirements 14 3 through 14 8 user record availability calculation 14 9 14 10 validity checks 14 11 through 14 13 14 33 14 34 Release 3 02 FCP conversion requirements 14 5 14 6 Release 3 02 online upgrade requirements 15 3 replacing cards 8 2 through 8 5 secondary file card status 4 21 through 4 23 4 24 status codes ...

Page 855: ...ollect utility Release 3 0 16 26 through 16 28 Get Logical Address utility Release 3 0 16 41 16 42 Get Physical Address utility Release 3 0 16 40 16 41 Grounding connections intercabinet 3 13 3 14 primary 3 16 through 3 18 measuring monthly 5 11 5 12 multicabinet ground strap 3 10 requirements 2 5 2 9 H H after digits in text 7 2 Handling disk drives 5 15 Hard disks see Disk drives Hardware see al...

Page 856: ...o Remote Diagnostic Administrative Center RDAC System manager terminal SMT RDAC terminal installation 3 46 customer requirements 3 46 overview 3 45 3 46 system manager terminal communication parameters 4 11 through 4 15 Keyboard menu 4 14 4 15 keyboard usage 4 2 through 4 4 port operating parameters 4 14 selecting 4 23 setup mode function key descriptions 4 12 setup mode screen 4 11 System Setup m...

Page 857: ...eplacement adding DLCs or TICs 8 8 8 9 changing installation information 4 41 through 4 43 disk drives de installing 9 5 16 23 16 24 message drive replacement 8 35 through 8 38 message drives 8 38 through 8 40 Release 3 0 utilities 16 21 through 16 25 replacement drive 16 20 16 21 system drive one replacement 8 32 through 8 35 system drive zero replacement 8 29 through 8 32 utility 9 3 9 4 16 22 1...

Page 858: ...17 9 18 Install Replacement Drive utility Release 3 0 16 20 16 21 Install table for drives reading 9 9 9 10 recovering 9 15 serial number locations 6 18 Integration data link connections 2 22 2 23 3 27 Integration Link Management menu see Menu 6 5 Integration links 4 54 through 4 57 ACP integration link additions 4 54 through 4 56 12 23 through 12 26 13 24 through 13 26 changing 4 56 12 26 13 26 c...

Page 859: ...6 22 6 31 monitor card described 6 22 10 10 10 11 illustrated 6 23 NSA indications 6 29 OOS indications 6 24 SA indications 6 26 NSA 10 10 ON 11 9 OOS 10 10 10 11 PFL 11 13 PWR 6 6 10 17 10 20 10 24 R 10 21 10 23 10 24 RD 10 10 RDY 11 9 11 10 REC 10 10 red alarm 10 21 10 23 10 24 redundant common control cards 10 6 RUN 6 32 10 31 SA 10 10 SBY 11 14 11 15 SEL 6 6 6 32 10 31 standby redundancy 11 13...

Page 860: ...hrough 13 15 converting to ACP integration 9 31 9 32 deleting all 16 24 16 25 directory mailboxes 4 33 4 34 Information Center mailboxes ICMBs 1 1 number of digits 4 28 4 30 9 35 through 9 37 Purge and Convert Follow Me Forward Mailbox conversion 14 36 test mailbox 4 58 5 10 Mailbox Name field 4 58 Mailbox Number field menu 0 directory mailbox 4 34 menu 0 primary system manager 4 33 menu 8 4 58 Ma...

Page 861: ...ease 3 0 16 11 16 12 Make Software Areas A and B Redundant utility Release 3 0 16 10 16 11 Make System Drives Redundant menu 16 12 16 13 Make System Drives Redundant utility Release 3 0 16 12 through 16 16 area A or B 16 13 16 14 both areas 16 14 through 16 16 Manual RDAC dialup 6 34 Maximum Time Before First Digit Received field 4 49 Max Msg Waiting Operations per second field 12 25 13 26 M colum...

Page 862: ...e was Received 4 42 Sender ID Used for Telephone Answering Messages 4 43 Type of PBX or Centrex VPMOD is on 4 42 VPMOD Phone Number include area code 4 42 illustrated 4 42 Menu 2 9 1 Menu 4 4 35 through 4 40 D column 4 38 described 4 35 4 36 Extension Phone No column 4 39 I column 4 39 illustrated 4 35 4 36 line type assignments 4 36 through 4 38 Ln Tp column 4 36 through 4 38 M column 4 39 N colu...

Page 863: ... XC1000 CPU serial channels and physical connectors 4 49 4 50 12 18 13 19 Menu 6 4 1 4 52 through 4 54 described 4 53 fields Baud Rate 4 53 12 22 13 23 Broadcast to this Channel for Dump IPL Y N 4 54 12 23 13 24 Data Carrier Detect Y N 4 54 12 23 13 24 Menu Access Allowed this Terminal 4 53 4 54 12 21 12 23 13 23 13 24 MTA Terminal Number 4 53 12 22 13 23 Number of Data Bits 4 54 12 23 13 23 Numbe...

Page 864: ...nus relevant for Release 3 02 FCP conversion 14 11 reformat menu access 16 44 utility menu access 9 1 through 9 3 9 30 Message blocks displaying 16 42 16 43 Message drives see also Disk drives copying messages 8 36 8 37 9 24 16 19 16 20 de installing 9 5 16 23 16 24 electrostatic discharge 5 15 handling 5 15 humidity requirement 5 15 initializing 9 6 9 7 16 3 16 4 installing additional drives 8 38...

Page 865: ... Monitor card see also Alarms audible alarm configuration switch settings 10 9 boot process display 4 25 4 26 checking connectors on distribution board 6 5 configuration 3 42 3 43 described 10 8 through 10 11 EPROM replacement 8 9 through 8 11 illustrated 6 23 LEDs described 6 22 10 10 10 11 illustrated 6 23 NSA indications 6 29 OOS indications 6 24 SA indications 6 26 Release 1 55 requirement 12 ...

Page 866: ... switches 3 42 3 43 connections 2 19 through 2 21 3 24 3 25 described 5 4 6 29 monitor card configuration switch settings 10 9 monitor card indications 6 29 remote alarm relay buzzer pattern 6 33 NO RESPONSE TO CB MESSAGE message 9 3 NOTIFY SUPPORT REPRESENTATIVE status code severity 7 4 NSA alarms see Alarms Non service affecting NSA alarms NSA LED 10 10 NS RDAC call status 6 35 NT RDAC call stat...

Page 867: ... upgrade 15 8 Begin Automatic Upgrade option 15 13 Setup Menu option 15 8 Utilities Menu option 15 10 Online upgrade tool installation 15 6 through 15 8 OOS alarms see Alarms Out of service OOS alarms OOS LED 10 10 10 11 Operating system see also Release 1 55 upgrade Release 2 X upgrade disk drives 1 4 loading 4 26 4 27 Release 1 55 upgrade 12 1 through 12 28 Release 2 X upgrade 13 1 through 13 38...

Page 868: ...rsion tool installation 14 16 loading software and phrases from diskettes 14 17 through 14 20 Mirror III installation 14 14 through 14 16 PCM pulse code modulation bus 1 3 P column menu 4 4 39 4 40 Personal computer see PC PF4 key 4 4 PFL LED 11 13 Phone include area code field 4 28 Phone numbers see Extension numbers Telephone numbers PHRASE RECORD UTILITY copy option J 9 26 Phrases copying betwe...

Page 869: ...10 1 replacing 8 48 through 8 50 alarms 5 6 6 23 6 26 6 29 6 31 connections intercabinet 3 13 3 14 primary 3 14 cooling fan power problems 6 5 6 6 disk drive power problems 6 5 6 6 electrical safety 3 2 3 3 interruption 10 5 measuring monthly 5 11 5 12 positive and negative terminals on power distribution shelf 6 3 power control assembly described 10 25 illustrated 10 1 replacing 8 48 through 8 50...

Page 870: ...5 Printers see also Fujitsu DL1200 printer Okidata Microline 320 ML320 printer installation 3 29 3 30 Mirror III configuration 14 16 parameters Fujitsu DL1200 4 5 through 4 7 Okidata ML320 4 9 through 4 11 Release 3 02 FCP conversion requirement 14 4 testing Fujitsu DL1200 4 7 4 8 HP 700 43 terminal printer 4 57 Okidata ML320 4 11 VT102 SMT parameters 4 17 VT220 SMT parameters 4 18 Printing alarm ...

Page 871: ...datafile size 16 37 through 16 39 garbage collect 8 26 through 8 28 before drive tests 9 28 Release 1 55 upgrade 12 5 through 12 7 Release 2 X upgrade 13 6 13 7 13 15 13 17 13 18 Release 3 0 utility 16 26 through 16 28 Release 3 02 FCP conversion 14 11 through 14 13 14 35 replacing message drives 8 36 running 9 32 through 9 35 updates Release 2 X 13 30 through 13 32 13 37 13 38 increasing number o...

Page 872: ...ment required 12 1 12 2 flowchart 12 1 garbage collect 12 5 through 12 7 hardware upgrade 12 8 through 12 13 overview 12 1 returning XC1000 to service 12 27 software upgrade 12 13 through 12 15 special message waiting for SMDI integrations 12 27 validity checks 12 3 through 12 5 Release 2 X upgrade 13 1 through 13 38 backing up system drive zero 13 7 through 13 9 configuring serial channel paramet...

Page 873: ...Message Blocks 16 42 16 43 Display Phrase Blocks 16 43 Message Id to Physical Address 16 44 overview 16 42 Miscellaneous Utilities 16 25 through 16 33 Add Bad Sector to Bad Sector Table 16 29 16 30 Clear Bad Write Table 16 30 16 31 Enable Disable Drive Read Only Mode 16 31 16 32 Garbage Collect 16 26 through 16 28 Initialize Drive 16 26 Initialize System 16 33 Reset CDR Pointers 16 32 16 33 Set Sy...

Page 874: ... 15 23 Setup Menu option 15 20 15 21 Utilities Menu option 15 20 through 15 24 Verify Upgrade Files option 15 22 online upgrade tool installation 15 6 through 15 8 overview 15 1 requirements EPROMs 15 3 15 4 hardware 15 2 through 15 4 software 15 4 running from diskettes 15 20 setup verification 15 8 15 9 software and phrases loading from diskettes 15 9 through 15 13 making areas redundant 15 18 1...

Page 875: ... EPROM replacement 8 9 through 8 11 replacing DLCs and TICs 8 5 through 8 8 message repair 14 39 14 40 overview 8 1 phrase repair 14 39 14 40 power distribution assembly replacement 8 41 through 8 44 power supplies 8 43 through 8 48 hot plug 8 48 non hot plug 8 43 through 8 47 overview 8 40 tools and materials required 8 40 side cover replacement 8 71 SMT replacement 8 71 XC1000 shutdown 8 1 REPLA...

Page 876: ...nformation on screen to XC1000 4 4 Send key DEC VT102 and VT220 keyboard 4 4 HP 700 43 or Wyse 50 keyboard 4 4 Serial bus terminator 3 10 Serial channels CPU 4 49 through 4 52 12 18 through 12 21 13 19 through 13 22 Serial number drive serial number correction 6 17 6 18 install table for drives 6 18 XC1000 multiple applications platform 4 30 Service see Maintenance Repair and replacement Troublesh...

Page 877: ...requirement 14 7 Software see also Operating system Release 1 55 upgrade Release 2 X upgrade Release 3 0 system utilities Release 3 02 online upgrade Release 3 02 FCP conversion System utilities alarms 5 4 5 5 copying between drives 9 19 through 9 21 16 6 16 7 displaying versions 16 16 FCP conversion tool installation 14 16 loading PC hard drive from diskettes Release 3 02 FCP conversion 14 17 thr...

Page 878: ...ct memory access DMA 4 26 line configuration 4 26 operating system loading 4 26 4 27 system status table SST 4 24 valid boot commands 4 24 CPU diagnostic tests 4 18 through 4 21 display at startup 4 19 IPL1 and IPL2 display 4 20 file card status 4 21 through 4 23 decimal binary and hexadecimal conversions 4 22 offset 00 4 21 4 22 offsets 01 and 03 4 23 offsets 01 through 04 4 22 status codes 4 21 ...

Page 879: ...e 7 30 through 7 32 CF status code 7 32 control bus CB messages 7 7 7 8 7 57 7 58 F0 through F3 status codes 7 32 through 7 34 F9 status code 7 34 through 7 45 FA status code 7 45 7 46 FB status code 7 47 header 7 2 through 7 4 input output request block IORB 7 5 nonredundant XC1000 6 11 offset 00 in CB message 7 7 7 8 offset 01 in CB message 7 8 offset 02 in CB message 7 8 offset 02 task source c...

Page 880: ...ive 16 17 16 18 installing replacement drive 16 20 16 21 taking XC1000 out of service 16 17 testing new drive 16 18 16 19 shock or vibration 5 15 storing 5 15 system drive one replacement 8 32 through 8 35 backing up system drive zero 8 33 installing replacement drive 8 34 overview 8 32 8 33 removing original drive one 8 34 testing the new drive 8 35 system drive zero replacement 8 29 through 8 32...

Page 881: ...EAR BAD WRITE TABLE copy option G 9 25 copying messages to replacement drive 8 37 9 24 copying system data to replacement drive 8 31 9 23 9 24 COPY SYSTEM DATA TABLES copy option C 9 22 9 23 DISK UTILITY copy option I 9 26 identifying bad sectors during copy or verify operations 9 19 illustrated 5 8 9 19 MESSAGES copy option E 9 24 overview 9 18 9 19 PHRASE RECORD UTILITY copy option J 9 26 PHRASE...

Page 882: ...Address 16 44 overview 16 42 Miscellaneous Utilities Release 3 0 16 25 through 16 33 Add Bad Sector to Bad Sector Table 16 29 16 30 Clear Bad Write Table 16 30 16 31 Enable Disable Drive Read Only Mode 16 31 16 32 Garbage Collect 16 26 through 16 28 Initialize Drive 16 26 Initialize System 16 33 Reset CDR Pointers 16 32 16 33 Set System Boot Area 16 28 16 29 overview 9 1 read only operation 9 29 1...

Page 883: ...2 FCP conversion requirements 14 5 14 6 Release 3 02 online upgrade requirements 15 4 replacing cards after shutdown 8 2 through 8 5 hot plug 8 5 through 8 8 status code port task source and channel correlation 7 55 7 56 T column menu 4 4 39 Telephone answering allowing 4 39 described 1 1 menu 1 1 4 43 menu 4 4 39 Telephone extensions see Extension numbers Telephone interface cards TICs see also A...

Page 884: ...PTIONS menu 4 23 Terminal setup menu DEC VT102 4 16 Terminal Type field 4 54 12 21 12 22 13 23 Terminators disk drive 8 23 main backplane 10 28 Testing see also External diagnostic tools Startup diagnostics Startup fault isolation Troubleshooting boot routine verification 4 59 card configuration test 6 19 6 20 CPU diagnostic tests 4 18 through 4 21 6 9 data bus direct memory access DMA test 4 26 6...

Page 885: ...non service affecting NSA alarms 6 29 through 6 31 out of service OOS alarms 6 22 through 6 26 service affecting SA alarms 6 26 through 6 29 Carbon Copy PLUS software 11 5 disk drives correcting faulty drive 6 14 through 6 17 correcting module seating 6 14 through 6 17 disk controller board 8 16 drive backplane inspection 8 11 failure symptoms 8 11 I O adapter board 8 15 repair and replacement 8 1...

Page 886: ...gh 12 13 Upgrading system drives 9 27 Upgrading system software see Release 1 55 upgrade Release 2 C upgrade Release 2 X upgrade Release 3 02 online upgrade Release 3 02 FCP conversion UPG utility 14 17 through 14 20 User records see Records User Setup menu HP 700 43 4 12 Utilities see Release 3 0 system utilities System utilities Utilities Menu option Release 3 02 online help Utilities Menu optio...

Page 887: ...ion 3 46 customer requirements 3 46 overview 3 45 4 37 system manager terminal SMT communication parameters 4 15 4 16 keyboard usage 4 2 through 4 4 selecting 4 23 X X 25 data module connection to XC1000 2 21 2 22 X 25 ports 10 29 XC1000 multiple applications platform call flow with switch 1 4 10 33 through 10 35 described 1 1 through 1 6 dimensions crated and uncrated 2 2 dual cabinet configurati...

Page 888: ...ge waiting for SMDI integrations 12 27 validity checks 12 3 through 12 5 Release 2 X upgrade 13 1 through 13 38 backing up system drive zero 13 7 through 13 9 configuring serial channel parameters 13 18 through 13 27 converting node records to user records 13 13 converting system distribution lists to mailboxes 13 13 through 13 15 copying phrases to system drives 13 11 through 13 13 EMI shielding ...

Page 889: ...ation input current requirements 2 6 logic bay slot assignments 3 31 Nonredundant configuration 1 2 S2 alarm configuration switches 3 44 starting up 4 18 startup diagnostics 4 18 through 4 27 boot process completion 4 23 through 4 27 CPU diagnostic tests 4 18 through 4 21 file card status 4 21 through 4 23 starting the XC1000 4 18 terminal type selection 4 23 updates Release 2 X 13 28 through 13 3...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for XC1000

Brand: Panasonic Pages: 24

Brand: Daewoo Pages: 13

Brand: Jabra Pages: 9

Brand: Jabra Pages: 10

Brand: T-Home Pages: 52

Brand: Facebook Pages: 5

Clear Sound CL455

Brand: Geemarc Pages: 64

Brand: Talkswitch Pages: 22

Brand: AT&T Pages: 4

Brand: Alcatel Pages: 2

3100 ICP - 4.0 L

Brand: Mitel Pages: 18

Brand: Depaepe Telecom Pages: 2

Brand: 3Com Pages: 130

Brand: Radio Shack Pages: 24

Brand: GAI-Tronics Pages: 16

Brand: Grandstream Networks Pages: 7

Brand: AEG Pages: 8

Brand: AEG Pages: 48

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands